Lexicon Home Theater System Lexicon MC 12 User Manual
MC-12 Digital Controller  
User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby," "Pro Logic," "Surround EX," and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European patent number 0323830. Other U.S. and  
foreign patents pending. Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under  
authorization.  
Lexicon, Inc.  
3 Oak Park  
"DTS," "DTS-ES," "Neo:6," and "DTS 96/24" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
Tel  
781-280-0300  
Fax 781-280-0490  
www.lexicon.com  
"Lexicon," "LOGIC7," and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553; D454,860; 5,796,844;  
5,870,480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending.  
Customer Support  
Tel  
781-280-0300  
Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)  
Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)  
© 2003 Lexicon, Inc. All rights reserved.  
This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Lexicon, Inc. The information it contains is subject to change without notice. Lexicon, Inc.  
assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document.  
Lexicon Part No. 070-14773 | Rev 2 | 06/03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Lexicon  
DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS  
This document contains general safety, installation, and operation instructions for the MC-12 and MC-12 Balanced Digital Controllers. It is important to read this user guide  
before attempting to use this product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.  
The following symbols are used in this document:  
Appears on the component to indicate the presence of  
uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside the enclosure – voltage  
that may be sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be selected with the  
ꢀ arrow button to access the menu or menu item in the black box. For instance,  
the SETUP, INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the DVD1  
INPUT SETUP menu.  
Appears on the component to indicate important operating  
and maintenance instructions in the accompanying literature.  
The DVD1 input is used here as an example, and will continue to be used as an  
example throughout this document.Whenever it appears as a step in a menu path,  
any other input may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
menu appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted.  
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like  
that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in  
injury or death.  
WARNING  
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like  
that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in  
damage or destruction to part or all of the product.  
CAUTION  
Note:  
Calls attention to information that is essential to highlight.  
•
•
This document uses the term MC-12 to refer to both the MC-12 and MC-12 Balanced Digital Controllers unless otherwise specified.  
This document uses the term dts(-ES) to indicate that dts-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MC-12  
Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v  
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v  
Instrucciones de seguridad importantes . . . . . . . . . . . . vi  
Instructions importantes relatives à la sécurité. . . . . . . . vi  
Importanti norme di sicurezza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Instruções importantes de segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Vigtig information om sikkerhed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Tärkeitä turvallisuusohjeita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Viktig informasjon om sikkerhet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Viktiga säkerhetsföreskrifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Section 1: Getting Started  
US  
DE  
ES  
FR  
IT  
About the MC-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Highlights • Product Registration  
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Do • Do Not  
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
PT  
DK  
FI  
Section 2: Basic Operation  
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
NO  
SE  
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item  
Selection • Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix  
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Auspacken und Überprüfung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Desembalaje e inspección. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Disimballaggio ed ispezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Retirando a embalagem e inspecionando . . . . . . . . . . . x  
US  
DE  
ES  
FR  
IT  
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Status Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
2CH STATUS • D STATUS •  
&
STATUS • 5.1 ANALOG STATUS •  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS • 2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS • Status Menu  
Parameter Descriptions  
PT  
. . . Section 3: SETUP continues on page iv  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Lexicon  
Section 3: SETUP  
Section 5: MODE ADJUST (continued)  
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
FILM •  
MOVIE •  
TV •  
PLII MUSIC •  
MUSIC •  
MUSIC SURR •  
PLII +  
FILM &  
•
PLII  
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
R
R
PRO LOGIC •  
Changing Input Names • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors •  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Input Settings  
MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB • CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL •  
PANORAMA • 2-CH SURROUND • 2-CHANNEL • MONO LOGIC • MONO  
SURROUND • MONO • 5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1 SurEX, & 5.1  
FILM • 5.1  
• 5.1  
TV • 5.1  
MUSIC • 5.1  
DIGITAL EX &  
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
MUSIC •  
Setting Crossover Points • Calibrating Speaker Distances & Output Levels •  
Automatic Calibration • Manual Calibration • Setting Bass Peak Limiters  
DIGITAL • 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC • 5.1 MONO SURR •  
5.1 MONO •  
MUSIC •  
Decoding •  
ULTRA2 &  
&
FILM •  
&
MUSIC •  
MUSIC  
•
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58  
&
•
&
2-CHAN • 5.1a  
SurEX, & 5.1a  
FILM • 5.1a  
• 5.1a  
• 5.1a  
ULTRA2, 5.1a  
MUSIC •  
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59  
5.1a STANDARD • 5.1a 2-CHANNEL • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS •  
OUTPUT LEVELS • CUSTOM  
On-Screen Display • Front Panel Display  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64  
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65  
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34  
Section 6: Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Section 4: AUDIO CONTROLS  
AUDIO CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Section 5: MODE ADJUST  
Appendix  
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Listening Mode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Menu Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5  
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode Buttons • Mode  
Family Selection Buttons  
Index  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MC-12  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
US  
US  
DE  
DE  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE  
•
•
•
Save these instructions for later use.  
•
•
•
Bewahren Sie diese Anleitungen zur späteren Benutzung auf.  
Follow all instructions and warnings marked on the unit.  
Befolgen Sie alle Anleitungen und alle Warnhinweise auf dem Gerät  
Always use with the correct line voltage. Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions  
for power requirements. Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use  
of a different line cord and/or attachment plug.  
Betreiben Sie das Gerät immer mit der korrekten Netzspannung. Angaben über den  
Strombedarf entnehmen Sie bitte den Betriebsanweisungen des Herstellers. Bei  
unterschiedlichen Betriebsspannungen kann die Verwendung anderer Netzkabel und/oder  
Anschlußstecker erforderlich werden.  
•
•
Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or directly above heat producing equipment  
such as power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in  
the product specification.  
•
•
Bauen Sie das Gerät nie in ein unbelüftetes Rack oder direkt über Wärme erzeugenden  
Geräten wie Verstärkern ein. Beachten Sie die in der Produktspezifikation aufgeführte  
maximale Umgebungstemperatur für den Betrieb.  
Slots and openings on the case are provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation  
and prevent it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. Never  
push objects of any kind through any of the ventilation slots. Never spill liquid of any kind  
on the unit.  
Schlitze und Öffnungen in der Box dienen der Belüftung, damit das Gerät zuverlässig läuft  
und sich nicht überhitzt. Diese Öffnungen dürfen nicht abgedeckt oder blockiert werden.  
Auch dürfen keine Gegenstände in sie hineingesteckt werden. Verschütten Sie niemals  
Flüssigkeiten, gleich welcher Art, auf das Gerät.  
•
•
Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit’s connectors.  
•
•
Schließen Sie niemals Stromausgänge des Audioverstärkers direkt an das Gerät an.  
To prevent shock or fire hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture, or operate it  
where it will be exposed to water.  
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen oder Brandgefahr darf das Gerät weder Regen  
noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt oder an Orten betrieben werden, wo es mit Wasser in  
Berührung kommen kann.  
•
•
Do not attempt to operate the unit if it has been dropped, damaged, exposed to liquids, or  
if it exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating the need for service.  
•
•
Versuchen Sie nie, das Gerät zu betreiben, wenn es fallen gelassen, beschädigt oder  
Flüssigkeiten ausgesetzt wurde oder wenn ein deutlicher Leistungsunterschied zu  
verzeichnen ist, der darauf hinweist, dass es gewartet werden muss.  
This unit should only be opened by qualified service personnel. Removing covers will  
expose you to hazardous voltages.  
Dieser Apparat sollte nur von qualifizierten Fachleuten geöffnet werden. Das Abnehmen  
von Abdeckungen setzt Sie gefährlichen Spannungen aus.  
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to the presence of  
uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside the enclosure…voltage that may be sufficient  
to constitute a risk of shock.  
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, warnt Sie vor dem  
Vorhandensein nicht isolierter gef hrlicher Spannung im Gerät. Diese Spannung  
kann so hoch sein, dass das Risiko eines Stromschlags besteht.  
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to important operating  
and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature.  
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, macht Sie auf wichtige  
Betriebs- und Wartungshinweise in diesen Hinweisen aufmerksam.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Lexicon  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ES  
ES  
FR  
FR  
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES  
INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES RELATIVES  
À LA SÉCURITÉ  
•
•
Guarde estas instrucciones para futuras referencias.  
•
•
Conservez ces instructions pour pouvoir vous y référer ultérieurement.  
Siga todas las instrucciones y tenga en cuenta las advertencias que aparecen en la  
unidad y en las instrucciones de funcionamiento.  
Suivez toutes ces instructions et tenez compte de tous les avertissements indiqués sur  
l’appareil et dans la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.  
•
Utilice siempre la tensión de línea correcta. Consulte las instrucciones del fabricante,  
donde se especifican los requisitos de alimentación. Tenga en cuenta que unas tensiones  
operativas diferentes pueden precisar de la utilización de diferentes cables de  
alimentación y/o enchufes.  
•
•
•
Utilisez toujours la tension secteur correcte. Consultez les instructions du fabricant  
précisant les caractéristiques d’alimentation à respecter. Attention, le type de cordon  
secteur et/ou de prise secteur peut varier selon des tensions en vigueur dans l’installation.  
•
•
No instale la unidad en un rack sin ventilación, o directamente sobre equipos que generen  
calor, como amplificadores de potencia. Tenga en cuenta la temperatura operativa  
ambiental máxima que se detalla en las especificaciones del producto.  
N’installez pas l’appareil dans un Rack mal ventilé ou directement au-dessus d’un appareil  
dégageant de la chaleur comme un amplificateur de puissance. Respectez la température  
maximale de fonctionnement précisée dans les caractéristiques techniques.  
Las ranuras y aberturas del equipo son para su ventilación - para garantizar un  
funcionamiento fiable y evitar que la unidad se sobrecaliente, no bloquee, cubra o inserte  
objetos en las aberturas. No derrame nunca líquidos de ningún tipo sobre la unidad.  
Les ouvertures dans le boîtier assurent la bonne ventilation de l’appareil, évitent toute  
surchauffe et assurent le bon fonctionnement du système. Veillez à ne pas obstruer,  
couvrir ou insérer d’objets dans ces ouvertures. Veillez à ne pas renverser de liquide sur  
l’appareil.  
•
•
•
Nunca conecte directamente salidas de amplificadores de potencia de audio a ninguno de  
los conectores de la unidad.  
•
•
•
Ne reliez jamais directement les sorties audio des amplificateurs de puissance aux  
connecteurs de l’appareil.  
Para evitar descargas eléctricas o incendios, no exponga la unidad a la humedad o la  
lluvia, ni la utilice donde pueda estar expuesta al agua.  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie, n’exposez pas l’appareil à la pluie  
ou à l’humidité ; ne l’utilisez pas dans des endroits exposés aux projections de liquides.  
No intente utilizar la unidad si ésta ha caído, se ha dañado, ha estado expuesta a líquidos,  
o si muestra un cambio importante en sus prestaciones, lo cual indicaría la necesidad de  
una reparación.  
N’essayez pas d’utiliser l’appareil si celui-ci est tombé, a été endommagé, exposé à des  
projections de liquides ou si vous constatez des dysfonctionnements nécessitant  
l’intervention d’un technicien spécialisé.  
•
Das Esta unidad deberá ser abierta únicamente por personal calificado. Si usted quita las  
coberturas se expondrá a voltajes peligrosos.  
•
Cet appareil ne doit être ouvert que par un personnel de service qualifié. En enlevant les  
couvercles vous vous exposez à des tensions électriques dangereuses.  
Este tri ngulo, que aparece en su componente, alerta de la presencia de una tensi  
n peligrosa no aislada en el interior del equipo - una tensi n que puede ser suficiente  
como para constituir un riesgo de descarga el ctrica.  
Le symbole de l’ clair fl ch dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr  
sence l’int rieur de l’appareil de tensions non isol es susceptibles de constituer un  
risque d’ lectrocution.  
Este tri ngjlo, que aparece en su equipo, le alerta de instrucciones operativas y de  
mantenimiento importantes en los documentos que acompa an el producto.  
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr  
sence de nombreuses instructions de maintenance dans le manuel fourni avec  
l’appareil.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MC-12  
ITALIANO  
PORTUGUESE  
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA  
IT  
IT  
PT  
PT  
IMPORTANTI NORME DI SICUREZZA  
•
•
Conservare le presenti norme per l’utilizzo futuro.  
•
•
Guarde essas instruções para uso posterior.  
Seguire sempre tutte le istruzioni e gli avvertimenti segnati sull’unità e nelle istruzioni  
operative.  
Siga todas as instruções e fique atento aos avisos marcados na unidade e nas instruções  
de operação.  
•
•
•
Utilizzare sempre la corretta tensione di alimentazione. Fare riferimento al manuale del  
costruttore per le caratteristiche di alimentazione. Tensioni di rete diverse necessitano  
anche di un diverso cavo con spine differenti.  
•
•
•
Sempre use com a voltagem correta. Veja no manual de instruções do fabricante qual a  
alimentação necessária. Lembre-se que voltagens de operação diferentes podem  
precisar de um cabo ou plug diferentes.  
Non installare l’unità in un rack poco ventilato, o direttamente sopra apparecchiature che  
producono calore, come amplificatori di potenza. Controllare la massima temperatura  
ambientale di esercizio sulle specifiche tecniche del prodotto.  
Não instale a unidade em um suporte sem ventilação ou diretamente acima de  
equipamentos que produzam calor, como transformadores. Observe a temperatura  
ambiente máxima de operação indicada na especificação do produto.  
Fori ed aperture nei pannelli sono necessari per garantire un corretta ventilazione e  
prevenire surriscaldamenti. Queste aperture non devono essere coperte o ostruite. Non  
inserire oggetti di alcun tipo nei fori di ventilazione. Evitare il contatto con liquidi di  
qualsiasi genere.  
O revestimento da unidade é provido de fendas e aberturas para ventilação – para  
assegurar uma operação confiável e evitar que a unidade se superaqueça. Não bloqueie,  
cubra ou insira objetos nas aberturas. Nunca derrube líquido de qualquer espécie na  
unidade.  
•
•
•
Evitare di collegare le uscite di un amplificatore di potenza direttamente a qualsiasi  
connettore dell’unità.  
•
•
•
Nunca ligue saídas de amplificadores de áudio diretamente a qualquer dos conectores da  
unidade.  
Per evitare il rischio di scosse elettriche non esporre il prodotto a pioggia o umidità. Evitare  
l’uso dove possa essere esposto all’acqua.  
Para evitar danos de choque ou fogo, não exponha a unidade à chuva ou umidade, ou  
opere-a onde haja exposição à água.  
Non tentare di utilizzare il prodotto se è caduto, se è stato a contatto con liquidi, o mostra  
chiari segni di danneggiamento o cambio di prestazioni che indicano la necessità di  
assistenza tecnica.  
Não tente operar a unidade se ela for derrubada, danificada, exposta à líquidos ou  
apresente uma mudança de performance notável, indicando a necessidade de  
manutenção.  
•
Ogni intervento sull’unità va eseguito esclusivamente da personale qualificato. La  
rimozione della copertura comporta l’esposizione al pericolo di folgorazione.  
•
Esta unidade só deveria ser aberta através de pessoal de serviço qualificado. Removendo  
coberturas o exporão a voltagens perigosas.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte la presenza di tensioni  
pericolose non isolate all interno della copertura – tali tensioni rappresentano un  
pericolo di folgorazione.  
Esse triângulo que aparece no seu console, alerta para a presença de voltagem  
perigosa e não isolada no recinto – voltagem que pode ser suficiente para constituir  
um risco de choque.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte l utente della presenza nella  
documentazione allegata di importanti istruzioni relative al funzionamento ed alla  
manutenzione.  
Esse triângulo ques aparece no seu console alerta para instruções importantes de  
operação e manutenção neste manual.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Lexicon  
DANSK  
SUOMI  
DK  
DK  
FI  
FI  
VIGTIG INFORMATION OM SIKKERHED  
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA  
•
•
•
Gem denne vejledning til senere brug.  
Følg alle anvisninger og advarsler på apparatet.  
•
•
•
Säilytä nämä ohjeet tulevaa käyttöä varten.  
Seuraa kaikkia yksikköön merkittyjä ohjeita ja varoituksia.  
Apparatet skal altid tilsluttes den korrekte spænding. Der henvises til brugsanvisningen,  
der indeholder specifikationer for strømforsyning. Der gøres opmærksom på, at ved  
varierende driftsspændinger kan det blive nødvendigt at bruge andre lednings- og/eller  
stiktyper.  
Käytä aina oikeaa verkkojännitettä. Tehovaatimukset selviävät valmistajan käyttöohjeista.  
Huomaa, että eri käyttöjännitteet saattavat vaatia toisenlaisen verkkojohdon ja/tai  
-pistokkeen käytön.  
•
•
Älä asenna yksikköä telineeseen jossa ei ole tuuletusta, tai välittömästi lämpöä tuottavien  
laitteiden, esim. tehovahvistimien, yläpuolelle.Ympäristön lämpötila käytössä ei saa ylittää  
tuotespesifikaation maksimilämpötilaa.  
•
•
Apparatet må ikke monteres i et kabinet uden ventilation eller lige over andet udstyr, der  
udvikler varme, f.eks. forstærkere. Den maksimale omgivelsestemperatur ved drift, der  
står opført i specifikationerne, skal overholdes.  
Kotelo on varustettu tuuletusreiillä ja -aukoilla. Luotettavan toiminnan varmistamiseksi ja  
ylilämpenemisen välttämiseksi näitä aukkoja ei saa sulkea tai peittää. Mitään esineitä ei  
saa työntää tuuletusaukkoihin. Mitään nesteitä ei saa kaataa yksikköön.  
Der er ventilationsåbninger i kabinettet. For at sikre apparatets drift og hindre over  
phedning må disse åbninger ikke blokeres eller tildækkes. Stik aldrig noget ind igennem  
ventilationsåbningerne, og pas på aldrig at spilde nogen form for væske på apparatet.  
•
•
Älä kytke audiotehovahvistimen lähtöjä suoraan mihinkään yksikön liittimeen.  
•
•
Udgangsstik fra audioforstærkere må aldrig sættes direkte i apparatet.  
Sähköiskun ja palovaaran välttämiseksi yksikkö ei saa olla sateessa tai kosteassa, eikä  
sitä saa käyttää märässä ympäristössä.  
Apparatet må ikke udsættes for regn eller fugt og må ikke bruges i nærheden af vand for  
at undgå risiko for elektrisk stød og brand.  
•
•
Älä käytä yksikköä jos se on pudonnut, vaurioitunut, kostunut, tai jos sen suorituskyky on  
huomattavasti muuttunut, mikä vaatii huoltoa.  
•
•
Apparatet må aldrig bruges, hvis det er blevet stødt, beskadiget eller vådt, eller hvis  
ændringer i ydelsen tyder på, at det trænger til eftersyn.  
Yksikön saa avata vain laitteeseen perehtynyt huoltohenkilö. Kansien poisto altistaa sinut  
vaarallisille jännitteille.  
Dette apparat må kun åbnes af fagfolk. Hvis dækslet tages af, udsættes man for livsfarlig  
højspænding.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, varoittaa sinua eristämättömän  
vaarallisen jännitteen esiintymisestä yksikön sisällä. Tämä jännite saattaa olla  
riittävän korkea aiheuttamaan sähköiskuvaaran.  
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om uisoleret, farlig spænding i apparatet -  
høj nok til at give elektrisk stød.  
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om vigtig driftsog vedligeholdsinformation  
i den tilhørende litteratur.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, kertoo sinulle, että tässä  
tuotedokumentoinnissa esiintyy tärkeitä käyttö- ja ylläpito-ohjeita.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
MC-12  
NORSK  
SVENSKA  
NO  
NO  
SE  
SE  
VIKTIG INFORMASJON OM SIKKERHET  
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSFÖRESKRIFTER  
•
•
•
Ta vare på denne veiledningen for senere bruk.  
•
•
•
Spara dessa föreskrifter för framtida bruk.  
Följ alla anvisningar och varningar som anges på enheten.  
Følg alle anvisningene og advarslene som er angitt på apparatet.  
Apparatet skal alltid anvendes med korrekt spenning. Produktbeskrivelsen inneholder  
spesifikasjoner for strømkrav. Vær oppmerksom på at det ved ulike driftsspenninger kan  
være nødvendig å bruke en annen ledning- og/eller støpseltype.  
Använd alltid rätt nätspänning. Se tillverkarens bruksanvisningar för information om  
effektkrav. Märkväl, att andra matningsspänningar eventuellt kräver att en annan typs  
nätsladd och/eller kontakt används.  
•
•
Apparatet skal ikke monteres i skap uten ventilasjon, eller direkte over varmeproduserende  
utstyr, som for eksempel kraftforsterkere. Den maksimale romtemperaturen som står  
oppgitt i produktbeskrivelsen, skal overholdes.  
•
•
Installera inte enheten i ett oventilerat stativ, eller direkt ovanför utrustningar som avger  
värme, t ex effektförstärkare. Se till att omgivningens temperatur vid drift inte överskrider  
det angivna värdet i produktspecifikationen.  
Apparatet er utstyrt med ventilasjonsåpninger. For at apparatet skal være pålitelig i bruk  
og ikke veropphetes, må disse åpningene ikke blokkeres eller tildekkes. Stikk aldri noe inn  
i ventilasjonsåpningene, og pass på at det aldri søles noen form for væske på apparatet.  
Behållaren är försedd med hål och öppningar för ventilering. För att garantera tillförlitlig  
funktion och förhindra överhettning får dessa öppningar inte blockeras eller täckas. Inga  
föremål får skuffas in genom ventilationshålen. Inga vätskor får spillas på enheten.  
•
•
Utgangsplugger fra audioforsterkere skal aldri koples direkte til apparatet.  
•
•
Anslut aldrig audioeffektförstärkarutgångar direkt till någon av enhetens kontakter.  
Unngå brannfare og elektrisk støt ved å sørge for at apparatet ikke utsettes for regn eller  
fuktighet og ikke anvendes i nærheten av vann.  
För att undvika elstöt eller brandfara får enheten inte utsättas för regn eller fukt, eller  
användas på ställen där den blir våt.  
•
•
Apparatet skal ikke brukes hvis det har blitt utsatt for støt, er skadet eller blitt vått, eller hvis  
endringer i ytelsen tyder på at det trenger service.  
•
•
Använd inte enheten om den har fallit i golvet, skadats, blivit våt, eller om dess prestanda  
förändrats märkbart, vilket kräver service.  
Dette apparatet skal kun åpnes av fagfolk. Hvis dekselet fjernes, utsettes man for livsfarlig  
høyspenning.  
Enheten får öppnas endast av behörig servicepersonal. Farliga spänningar blir tillgängliga  
när locken tas bort.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som er en advarsel om at det finnes  
uisolert, farlig spenning inne i kabinettet - høy nok til å utgjøre en fare for elektrisk  
støt.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, varnar dig om en oisolerad farlig  
spänning inne i enheten. Denna spänning är eventuellt så hög att fara för elstöt  
föreligger.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som betyr at den tilhørende  
litteraturen inneholder viktige opplysninger om drift og ved.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, anger att viktiga bruksanvisningar och  
serviceanvisningar ingår i dokumentationen i fråga.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Lexicon  
FR  
US  
Unpacking and Inspection  
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection  
After unpacking the unit, save all packing materials in case the unit  
ever needs to be shipped. Thoroughly inspect the modules and  
packing materials for signs of damage. Report any damage to the  
carrier at once; report equipment malfunction to the dealer.  
Après avoir ouvert l’emballage, conservez-le pour tout retour.  
Inspectez avec soin les modules et les matériaux d’emballage pour  
tout signe de dommage. Veuillez rapporter immédiatement les  
dommages auprès du transporteur. Les dysfonctionnements du  
matériel doivent être signalés à votre revendeur.  
Auspacken und Überprüfung  
DE  
Disimballaggio ed ispezione  
IT  
Bewahren Sie nach dem Auspacken des Geräts das  
Verpackungsmaterial für den Fall auf, dass Sie das Gerät wieder  
versenden müssen. Überprüfen Sie die Module und die Verpackung  
sorgfältig auf Anzeichen von Beschädigung. Etwaige Schäden sind  
dem Transporteur unverzüglich anzuzeigen; Funktionsstörungen  
sind dem zuständigen Händler zu melden.  
Dopo aver disimballato l’unità, salvi tutto il materiale d’imballaggio,  
in caso Lei abbia bisogno di spedire l’unità. Ispezioni attentamente  
i moduli ed il materiale d’imballaggio per vedere se riportano  
segni di danno. Riporti subito ogni segno di danno al corriere;  
riferisca il malfunzionamento dell’attrezzatura al suo rivenditore.  
Desembalaje e inspección  
Retirando a embalagem e Inspecionando  
ES  
PT  
Después de desembalar la unidad, guarde todos los materiales de  
embalaje por si alguna vez transportar la unidad. Inspeccione con  
atención los módulos y los materiales de embalaje para comprobar  
que no muestren desperfectos. Informe inmediatamente de  
cualquier desperfecto al transportista; informe de cualquier  
problema de funcionamiento del equipo a su distribuidor.  
Depois de desembalar a unidade, guarde a embalagem caso precise  
enviar a unidade para manutenção. Inspecione cuidadosamente o  
módulo e a embalagem procurando sinais de dano. Avise à loja  
qualquer tipo de dano ou mal funcionamento do equipamento.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Getting Started  
About the MC-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Highlights • Product Registration  
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Do • Do Not  
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Lexicon  
In addition to LOGIC7, the MC-12 is also equipped with Dolby  
Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic, dts 96/24,  
dts NEO:6, dts-ES, THX Ultra2, and THX Surround EX decoding.  
THX Ultra2 Certification guarantees that the MC-12 meets the  
highest THX performance specifications.  
ABOUT THE MC-12  
Thank you for purchasing the MC-12 Digital Controller, a reference-  
quality, 12-channel audio and video control center with independent  
zone monitoring to provide control of input source selection in three  
zones at the same time. As flexible as it is powerful, the MC-12  
includes 12 configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to  
its 13 digital audio, 8 analog audio, 5 composite video, 8 S-video,  
or 4 component video input connectors. The analog audio input  
connectors can be configured for stereo or 5.1-channel sources.  
With four 32-bit floating-point SHARC™ digital signal processing  
(DSP) engines, the MC-12 offers unparalleled processing power .  
These DSP engines perform custom Lexicon processing such as  
LOGIC7 decoding, bass enhancement, dialog enhancement,  
auto azimuth, 5-speaker enhancement, bass management, high-  
precision digital crossovers, and tone controls. This processing is  
available at sample rates up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to  
retain top performance from all input sources and listening modes.  
A fifth DSP engine is dedicated to decoding multi-channel  
compressed audio sources.  
Beyond the standard 5.1-channel audio output connectors, the  
rear panel includes stereo rear and stereo subwoofer connectors, as  
well as stereo auxiliary connectors to provide even more audio  
channels. All Main Zone audio output connectors include 24-bit/  
96kHz D/A converters operating in dual differential mode. In  
addition, the MC-12 Balanced includes balanced audio output  
connectors for all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels.  
High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can be used to convert  
stereo analog audio input signals to digital signals, allowing the  
MC-12 to provide the benefits of precise digital signal processing  
without sacrificing signal integrity. Alternatively, stereo analog signals  
can bypass A/D conversion and internal processing to remain in the  
analog domain straight to the output connectors.  
Inside and out, the MC-12 is designed to remain viable in a future  
of emerging technologies. Two RS-232 connectors are provided for  
serial control, one to perform flash-memory software upgrades and  
configuration tool downloads and another to support future  
expansion. A removable access panel is provided to accommodate  
new connectors. Inside, two expansion slots are available for future  
hardware upgrades, making it possible to more than quadruple the  
MC-12’s tremendous processing power.  
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage  
phase lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.  
Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and  
level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate  
playback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio pass-  
through option is available for recording digital signals with a CD  
recorder or a similar component.  
More than just an audio and video control center, the MC-12  
features the latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed LOGIC7  
decoding, which derives 7.1-channel output from stereo, 5.1-, and  
6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, LOGIC7 is compatible  
with all input sources and requires no special encoding. Because  
the improvement it provides is clearly audible, LOGIC7 decoding is  
widely regarded as the finest available.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
MC-12  
Complementing its pristine audio performance, the MC-12  
includes two broadcast-quality video switchers. An ultra-wide  
bandwidth component video switcher accepts analog component  
or RGB video signals, while a composite and S-video switcher  
accepts high-quality NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video signals. The  
component video switcher can pass High-Definition TV (HDTV)  
and Standard-Definition TV signals. Both switchers are designed to  
pass video signals without alteration or degradation.  
An unparalleled processor, the MC-12 represents a solid investment  
with awesome power, limitless possibilities, and leading-edge  
technological sophistication. Even the most demanding enthusiasts  
will be impressed with its exceptional performance. Add to this  
extensive expansion capabilities, and the MC-12 is a must-have  
addition for any high-quality home theater.  
HIGHLIGHTS  
•
•
•
•
12 channels  
•
•
•
Automatic and manual calibration of  
speaker distances and output levels  
•
THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX  
decoding  
12 configurable inputs  
3 independent zones  
4 component video input connectors  
with full HDTV compatibility  
•
•
THX Ultra2 Certification  
RS-232 connector for flash memory  
software upgrades and configuration  
tool downloads  
13 digital audio input connectors,  
including 6 S/PDIF coaxial, 6 S/PDIF  
optical, and 1 AES/EBU  
BNC component video input and  
output connectors  
•
•
•
•
•
8 S-video input connectors  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 digital audio output connectors  
3 trigger output connectors  
Rear panel IR input connector  
4 microphone input connectors  
2 internal expansion slots  
•
•
5.1-channel analog audio input  
connector  
5 composite video input connectors  
Broadcast-quality video switching  
Four 32-bit DSP engines  
Analog bypass option for stereo and  
5.1-channel analog audio input  
connectors  
Separate DSP engine for decoding  
compressed audio sources  
•
•
•
Auto switching between digital and  
analog audio input connectors  
Removable access panel  
•
•
LOGIC7 decoding  
24-bit/192kHz D/A converters for all  
Main Zone audio channels  
Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit  
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby  
Pro Logic II, and Dolby Pro Logic  
decoding  
Balanced audio output connectors for  
all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels  
(MC-12 Balanced only)  
Stereo subwoofer and LFE output  
connectors  
•
dts 96/24, dts NEO:6, and dts-ES  
(discrete and matrix) decoding  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Lexicon  
PRODUCT REGISTRATION  
DO NOT (continued)  
Please register the MC-12 Digital Controller within 15 days of  
purchase. To do so, register online at www.lexicon.com or  
complete and return the product registration card attached to the  
back cover of this user guide. The product registration card serves  
no warranty purposes. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty  
coverage.  
•
•
•
Place the MC-12 on a thick rug or carpet or cover the MC-12  
with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.  
Place the MC-12 on a windowsill or in another location in  
which it will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Obstruct the front panel IR receiver. When the MC-12 is not  
using the rear panel IR IN connector, the remote control must  
be in line-of-sight with the IR receiver for proper operation.  
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS  
The MC-12 requires special care during installation to ensure  
optimal performance. Pay particular attention to the bulleted items  
that begin below and to other precautions that appear throughout  
this user guide.  
Before moving the MC-12, make sure it is powered off with the  
rear panel power switch. Then, make sure the power cord is  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION  
DO  
•
•
Install the MC-12 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table  
or shelf. The MC-12 can also be installed in a standard 19-inch  
equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available  
from authorized Lexicon dealers.  
Select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.  
DO NOT  
•
Expose the MC-12 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,  
smoke, dampness, or excessive dust. Avoid installing the MC-12  
near radiators and other heat-producing appliances.  
•
Install the MC-12 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable TV  
decoders, and other RF-emitting devices that might cause  
interference.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
MC-12  
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION  
The remote control requires two AA batteries that should be replaced as needed. It is recommended to use Alkaline batteries, which last longer  
without leaking. When the batteries are low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it from operating the  
MC-12. When this occurs, follow the instructions below to replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.  
To replace the remote control batteries:  
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Then, remove the battery compartment cover as shown in Figure 1-A  
(bottom-left). To do this, press the tab attached to the cover. When the tab is pressed, pull the cover away from the remote control.  
2. Remove old batteries inserted in the battery compartment (if applicable).  
3. Insert two AA batteries in the compartment as shown in Figure 1-B (bottom-center). Make sure the batteries are correctly inserted observing  
the proper polarity.  
4. When new batteries have been installed, close the battery compartment cover as shown in Figure 1-C (bottom-right). To do this, align the  
cover with the guide on the back of the remote control. When the cover is aligned, press the cover until it "snaps" into place.  
5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).  
Figure 1-A  
Figure 1-B  
Figure 1-C  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Basic Operation  
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item  
Selection • Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix  
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Status Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
2CH STATUS • D STATUS •  
&
STATUS • 5.1 ANALOG STATUS •  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS • 2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS • Status Menu  
Parameter Descriptions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW  
2
3
6
4
7
9
11  
1
5
8
10  
12  
The MC-12 front panel is shown above. The MC-12 Balanced front panel is shown on page 2-4. The front panels are identical, except the MC-12 Balanced has a larger chassis. The  
numbers in the front panel illustrations above and on page 2-4 correspond with the numbered items on pages 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, and 2-5.  
When standby mode is activated, pressing the standby button  
1. Standby Button  
deactivates standby mode and activates the MC-12 including  
Activates and deactivates standby mode when the MC-12 is  
all zones that were activated during the previous operating  
powered on with the rear panel power switch. The standby button  
session. When standby mode is deactivated, pressing the  
performs no function when the MC-12 is powered off with the rear  
standby button activates standby mode and deactivates the  
panel power switch.  
MC-12. The red standby button LED lights to indicate that  
standby mode is activated.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
For example, if a 2-channel source is present, the Mode ꢀ and ꢁ  
buttons scroll through available 2-channel listening modes. The  
selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of  
the Main Zone two-line status. The MC-12 automatically  
activates the selected listening mode when scrolling stops.  
Note:  
Power is still supplied to the MC-12 when standby  
mode is activated.  
2. Front Panel Display  
5. Mute Button  
Indicates the current input, listening mode, input source, and  
volume level. This 2 x 20 character display can also be used to  
view messages and menus, one line at a time.  
Mutes Main Zone volume level and restores Main Zone volume  
to its original level. Pressing the Mute button once lowers Main  
Zone volume level. The message "MUTE ON" appears on the  
on-screen and front panel displays. Pressing the Mute button  
again restores Main Zone volume to its original level. The  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu MUTE LEVEL parameter can  
be used to set mute levels.  
3. IR Receiver  
Receives infrared commands from the MC-12 remote control.  
There are three LEDs located in this area as shown below. An  
amber LED blinks when a remote control command is received.  
A red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.  
And, a blue LED lights when the MC-12 is powered on and  
activated – even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF.  
The amber Mute button LED lights whenever mute is activated,  
whether activated automatically or manually. For instance, the  
MC-12 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or  
listening modes.  
6. Volume Knob  
Red LED  
Blue LED  
Amber LED  
Adjusts volume level in all zones.  
4. Mode ꢀ & ꢁ Buttons  
Note:  
Scroll to the previous and next available listening mode,  
auditioning listening modes with the current Main Zone input  
source. Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE  
ADJUST menu. Pressing the Mode ꢀ button scrolls upward  
through available listening modes, and pressing the Mode ꢁ  
button scrolls downward through available listening modes.  
When MC-12 output levels have been properly  
calibrated, the +0dB volume level setting corresponds  
to THX reference levels (75dB).  
. . . Front Panel Overview continues on page 2-4  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Front Panel Overview (continued from page 2-3)  
2
3
6
4
7
9
11  
1
5
8
10  
12  
The MC-12 Balanced front panel is shown above. The MC-12 front panel is shown on page 2-2. The front panels are identical, except the MC-12 Balanced has a larger chassis. The  
numbers in the front panel illustrations above and on page 2-2 correspond with the numbered items on pages 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, and 2-5.  
To use the volume knob to adjust Main Zone volume level:  
1. Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB increments. The  
VOLUME  
-34dB  
horizontal graph shown here appears on the on-screen and front panel displays. This graph illustrates the  
position at which the current Main Zone volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
To use the volume knob to adjust Zone 2 or Record Zone  
corresponding input. Zone 2 and the Record Zone remain  
deactivated until a Zone 2 or Record Zone input is selected.  
volume level:  
1. Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 or Record Zone input  
selection button that corresponds with the current input  
source. For instance, if the current input source is using the  
DVD1 input, press and hold the DVD1 input selection button.  
8. Main Zone Off Button  
Deactivates the Main Zone.  
2. While holding the selected Zone 2 or  
ZONE2 VOLUME -34dB  
Record Zone input selection button,  
rotate the volume knob clockwise to  
increase or counterclockwise to decrease  
volume level in 1dB increments. The  
corresponding horizontal graph shown  
here appears on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
These graphs illustrate the position at which the current  
Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level falls within the –80 to  
+12dB volume range.  
9. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons  
RECORD VOLUME -34dB  
Selects the input in Zone 2. When an input is selected, an  
amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.  
When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input selection  
button activates Zone 2 and selects the corresponding input.  
The Main and Record Zones remain deactivated until a Main or  
Record Zone input is selected.  
3. Release the selected Zone 2 or Record Zone input selection  
button when Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level has  
been set.  
10.Zone 2 Off Button  
Deactivates Zone 2.  
11.Record Zone Input Selection Buttons  
Note:  
Selects the input in the Record Zone. When an input is selected,  
a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.  
When the Record Zone is deactivated, pressing a Record Zone  
input selection button activates the Record Zone and selects  
the corresponding input. The Main Zone and Zone 2 remain  
deactivated until a Main Zone or Zone 2 input is selected.  
Remote control input selection buttons cannot be  
used to select Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level  
adjustment, even if the Zone 2 or Record Zone  
command bank is activated.  
7. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons  
Selects the input in the Main Zone. When an input is selected,  
a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.  
When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone  
input selection button activates the Main Zone and selects the  
12.Record Zone Off Button  
Deactivates the Record Zone.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
REAR PANEL OVERVIEW  
9
9
10  
6
11  
14 16 1  
SERIAL NO.  
INPUTS  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MC-12  
LEXICON, INC.  
DESIGNED AND  
ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A.  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 4  
INPUT 3  
OUTPUT  
MAIN OUTPUTS  
RECORD OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
1 (OSD)  
2
1
2
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUBWOOFER  
SIDE  
REAR  
AUX  
Fix  
Var  
Fix  
Var  
ZONE 2  
CAUTION  
(L)  
(R)  
(C)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
ATTENTION  
RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQUE  
(SUB)  
NE PAS OUVRIR  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AC 100-240V~, 50-60 Hz, 90W  
LFE  
MICROPHONE INPUTS  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
MAIN AUDIO OUTPUTS  
4
1
2
5
3
1
2
3
1
4
2
3
6
S/PDIF  
RS 232  
TRIGGER OUTPUTS  
1
2
IR IN  
4
6
5
LISTED  
AUDIO  
EQUIPMENT  
OMJ  
C
US  
+
–
+
–
+
–
24PB  
PWR  
1
2
4
3
13  
15  
5
12  
7
2
The MC-12 rear panel is shown above. The MC-12 Balanced rear panel is shown on  
page 2-8. The rear panels are identical, except the MC-12 Balanced includes balanced  
audio output connectors for the Main Zone and Zone 2. The numbers in the rear panel  
illustrations above and on page 2-8 correspond with the numbered items on pages  
2-7, 2-9, and 2-10.  
Never make or break connections to the MC-12 unless the  
MC-12 and all associated components are powered off.  
CAUTION  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
column. When a 5.1-channel analog source is present in the  
Main Zone and the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD  
IN parameter is set to DMIX, only the (L) and (R) input  
signals are sent to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output  
connectors.  
1. Power Switch  
Connects power to the AC input connector and disconnects  
power from the AC input connector. The c represents the "off"  
position and the|represents the "on" position. When the  
MC-12 is powered on, the standby button can be used to  
activate and deactivate standby mode. When the MC-12 is  
powered off, standby mode is not available.  
Input Connector(s)  
(L) & (R)  
Output Connector(s)  
Front L/R  
2. AC Input Connector  
(C)  
Center  
Provides power to the MC-12 through the supplied power cord  
(3 wire, 10 amp, IEC 320).  
(SUB)  
Subwoofer L/R & LFE  
Side L/R & Rear L/R  
(LS) & (RS)  
3. Digital Audio Input Connectors (S/PDIF & AES/EBU)  
5. Main Zone Audio Output Connectors  
Provide digital audio input in all zones. Six S/PDIF coaxial,  
six S/PDIF optical (TosLink), and one AES/EBU (XLR) input  
connectors are available. These connectors are compatible with  
PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES)  
sources. These connectors are not compatible with MPEG or  
MP3 sources.  
Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Ten connectors  
labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, and  
Rear L/R are available. Two connectors labeled Aux L/R are  
provided for future expansion.  
6. Zone 2 Audio Output Connectors  
4. Analog Audio Input Connectors  
Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two stereo connectors  
labeled Audio L/R are available. The connector labeled Fix  
passes audio at fixed output levels. The connector labeled Var  
passes audio at variable output levels and includes a built-in  
volume control.  
Provide analog audio input in all zones. Eight stereo analog  
audio input connectors labeled 1 to 8 are available. The  
connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 can be configured as a 5.1-  
channel connector.  
. . . Rear Panel Overview continues on page 2-8  
When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main  
Zone, input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output  
connectors as indicated in the table at the top of the next  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Rear Panel Overview (continued from page 2-7)  
9
9
10  
6
11  
14 16 1  
SERIAL NO.  
INPUTS  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MC-12  
LEXICON, INC.  
DESIGNED AND  
ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A.  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 4  
INPUT 3  
OUTPUT  
MAIN OUTPUTS  
RECORD OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
1 (OSD)  
2
1
2
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUBWOOFER  
SIDE  
REAR  
AUX  
Fix  
Var  
Fix  
Var  
ZONE 2  
CAUTION  
(L)  
(R)  
(C)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
ATTENTION  
RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQUE  
(SUB)  
NE PAS OUVRIR  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AC 100-240V~, 50-60 Hz, 90W  
LFE  
MICROPHONE INPUTS  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
MAIN AUDIO OUTPUTS  
4
1
2
5
3
1
2
3
1
4
2
3
6
S/PDIF  
RS 232  
TRIGGER OUTPUTS  
1
2
IR IN  
4
6
5
LISTED  
AUDIO  
EQUIPMENT  
OMJ  
C
US  
+
–
+
–
+
–
24PB  
PWR  
1
2
L
FRONT  
R
CENTER  
LFE  
L
SUBWOOFER  
R
L
SIDE  
R
L
REAR  
R
L
AUX  
R
L
ZONE 2  
R
4
3
8
13  
15  
5
12  
7
8
2
The MC-12 Balanced rear panel is shown above. The MC-12 rear panel is shown on  
page 2-6. The rear panels are identical, except the MC-12 Balanced includes balanced  
audio output connectors for the Main Zone and Zone 2. The numbers in the rear panel  
illustrations above and on page 2-6 correspond with the numbered items on pages  
2-7, 2-9, and 2-10.  
Never make or break connections to the MC-12 unless the  
MC-12 and all associated components are powered off.  
CAUTION  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
7. Record Zone Audio Output Connectors  
10.Main Zone Video Output Connectors  
Provide analog and digital audio output in the Record Zone.  
Two stereo connectors labeled Audio L/R are available for  
analog audio output. The connector labeled Fix passes audio at  
fixed output levels. The connector labeled Var passes audio at  
variable output levels and includes a built-in volume control.  
Two S/PDIF connectors (one coaxial and one optical) are  
available for digital audio output.  
Provide video output in the Main Zone. Two composite video  
connectors, two S-video connectors, and one component  
video connector (BNC) are available. The composite and  
S-video connectors labeled 1 (OSD) incorporate the on-screen  
display.  
Note:  
•
•
•
Composite video output connectors are available  
when a composite or S-video source is present.  
Alternatively, these connectors can be used to connect a  
recording device. When the Record Zone audio output  
connector labeled Var is sent to a recording device, it is  
recommended to set the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu  
REC PWR ON parameter to +0dB to achieve appropriate  
recording levels. The Record Zone audio output connector  
labeled Var passes audio at variable output levels. Adjusting  
Record Zone volume level will affect the recording.  
S-video output connectors are available when an  
S-video source is present.  
Component video output connectors are available  
when a component video source is present.  
11.Record Zone Video Output Connectors  
Provide video output in the Record Zone. Two composite video  
connectors and two S-video connectors are available.  
Alternatively, these connectors can be used to connect a video  
recording device.  
8. Balanced Audio Output Connectors (MC-12 Balanced)  
Provide balanced analog audio output in the Main Zone and Zone  
2. Ten connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer  
L/R, Side L/R, and Rear L/R are available in the Main Zone. The  
connectors labeled Aux L/R are provided for future expansion.  
Two connectors labeled Zone 2 L/R are available in Zone 2.  
12.RS-232 Connectors  
Provide serial control. The RS-232 connector labeled 1 is  
provided to perform flash memory software upgrades and  
configuration tool downloads. The RS-232 connector labeled 2  
is provided to support future expansion.  
9. Video Input Connectors  
Provide video input in the Main and Record Zones. Five  
composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, eight S-video  
connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 8, and four component video  
connectors (three RCA and one BNC) labeled INPUT 1 to 4 are  
available. The component video connectors are not available  
for the Record Zone.  
. . . Rear Panel Overview continues on page 2-10  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Rear Panel Overview (continued from page 2-9)  
REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW  
The MC-12 remote control provides full operation of the MC-12,  
performing commands such as menu navigation that are not  
available from the front panel. The command matrix that begins  
on page 2-14 indicates the commands remote control buttons  
perform when each command bank is activated. The numbered  
items in the matrix correspond with the remote control illustrations  
on pages 2-14 to 2-18.  
Note:  
The numbered items below correspond with the rear  
panel illustrations on pages 2-6 and 2-8.  
13.Trigger Output Connectors  
Provide 12V DC output to control connected components.  
Three trigger output connectors are available on a removable  
terminal block. The connector labeled PWR – the power trigger  
output connector – is not configurable. It is activated when the  
MC-12 is activated, and deactivated when the MC-12 is  
deactivated. The trigger output connectors labeled 1 and 2 can  
be configured for remote or program operation.  
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS  
The bulleted items that begin below describe factors that can  
improve or impede remote control operation. It is recommended  
to observe these items as well as the battery installation instructions  
on page 1-5 before operating the remote control.  
Please note the following before operating the MC-12 remote  
control:  
14.IR IN Connector  
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.  
One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring connection)  
or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.  
•
When the MC-12 is not using the rear panel IR IN connector,  
the remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front panel  
IR receiver for proper operation. Eliminate obstructions  
between the remote control and the IR receiver. The remote  
control might become unreliable if strong sunlight or  
fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.  
15.Microphone Input Connectors  
Provide microphone input for speaker distance and output  
level calibration. Four 3.5mm Tip/Ring/Sleeve connectors are  
available.  
•
For optimal performance, position the remote control at a 30  
degree angle no more than 17 feet (5m) from the MC-12. If  
the MC-12 is placed inside a glass cabinet, smoked glass will  
reduce the remote control range.  
•
•
Remote controllers for different components can interfere with  
one another. It is recommended to avoid using remote controls  
for different components at the same time.  
16.Removable Access Panel  
Accommodates connectors for emerging technologies.  
The remote control batteries should be replaced as needed.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
MENU NAVIGATION  
MAIN MENU  
The remote control MENU and arrow buttons must be used to  
navigate the extensive menu structure shown in the Appendix. The  
table below indicates the navigation commands remote control  
buttons perform when the Main Zone command bank is activated.  
The MAIN MENU represents the beginning  
of the menu structure. It can be used to  
open the three main menu branches: MODE  
ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP.  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
Button  
Navigation Command(s)  
•
•
When a menu is open, pressing the MENU button closes the menu structure.  
When no menus are open, pressing the MENU button opens the MAIN MENU.  
MENU  
•
When a menu is open, pressing the ꢂ arrow button selects the highlighted menu item, which selects the highlighted  
parameter setting or opens a menu, drop-down menu, or horizontal graph.  
•
•
When no menus are open, pressing the ꢂ arrow button opens the MAIN MENU.  
When a menu is open, pressing the ꢃ arrow button closes the menu and, in most cases, opens the previous menu.  
Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed.  
When the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.  
•
•
When no menus are open, pressing the ꢃ arrow button performs no function.  
When a drop-down menu is open, pressing the ꢃ arrow button selects the current setting and closes the drop-down  
menu.  
•
When a menu is open, pressing the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons scrolls upward and downward through the complete list  
of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears on the front panel display. All menu items appear on the on-screen  
display. A scroll bar appears on the right side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display  
top and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is  
passed.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
MENU ITEM SELECTION  
The remote control arrow buttons must be used to select menu items.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
DISPLAY SETUP  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
DISPLAY SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OOFFFF  
OOFFFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
OFF  
To select a menu item on the open menu:  
DISPLAY SETUP menu CUSTOM NAME parameter opens the drop-  
down menu shown above (left), which can be used to select the  
ON or OFF setting.  
1. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
menu item.  
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the ꢂ  
arrow button to select the highlighted item. If an option is  
selected, another menu will open. If a parameter is selected, a  
parameter drop-down menu or horizontal graph will open.  
To select the desired setting on a parameter drop-down menu:  
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow  
buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete  
list of available settings. The current setting appears beneath  
the parameter name on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
Options  
2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter  
name, press the ꢃ arrow button to select the setting and close  
the drop-down menu.  
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu  
structure. For instance, selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option  
opens the SETUP menu as shown above.  
A horizontal graph indicates the position at which the current  
parameter setting falls within the entire parameter range. For  
instance, selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu A/V SYNC DELAY  
parameter opens the horizontal graph shown above (right), which  
can be used to adjust the amount of audio delay.  
Parameters  
Selecting a menu parameter opens a drop-down menu or horizontal  
graph that can be used to select the desired setting. A drop-down  
menu contains a list of available settings. For instance, selecting the  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
To select a parameter setting with a horizontal graph:  
To activate a command bank:  
1. Press and release a command bank selection button to activate  
the desired command bank.  
1. When the horizontal graph appears, press the ꢀ and ꢁ  
arrow buttons to increase and decrease the setting in designated  
increments. The current setting appears at the right of the  
parameter name on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
2. Press a remote control button to send the associated command  
to the MC-12. The command matrix that begins on the next  
page indicates the commands remote control buttons perform  
when each command bank is activated.  
2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the ꢃ  
arrow button to select the setting and close the horizontal  
graph.  
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu REMOTE STATE parameter controls  
the remote control command bank indicator that appears on the  
on-screen display. When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to  
ON, a command bank indicator appears in the top-right corner of  
the on-screen display to indicate the last command bank from  
which the MC-12 received a command. When the REMOTE STATE  
parameter is set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears on  
the on-screen display.  
COMMAND BANK ACTIVATION  
Remote control buttons perform different commands depending  
on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Record Zone, or Shift  
command bank is activated. Pressing and releasing a remote  
control command bank selection button – MAIN, ZONE, REC, or  
SHIFT – activates the corresponding command bank. The selected  
command bank remains activated until another command bank is  
activated.  
A "Z" appears when a command from the Zone 2 command bank  
was received last. An "R" appears when a command from the  
Record Zone command bank was received last. An "S" appears  
when a command from the Shift command bank was received last.  
No letter appears when a command from the Main Zone command  
bank was received last.  
The command bank selection buttons themselves do not send  
commands to the MC-12. When pressed and released, these  
buttons activate the corresponding command bank. For instance,  
pressing and releasing the SHIFT button activates the Shift  
command bank. When the Shift command bank is activated,  
pressing and releasing the DVD-1 button selects the DVD1 input  
for the Main Zone.  
COMMAND MATRIX  
The command matrix that begins on the next page indicates the  
commands remote control buttons perform when each command  
bank is activated. The numbers in the MC-12 remote control  
illustrations that also begin on the next page correspond with the  
numbered items in the matrix.  
Note:  
Remote control command bank selection buttons  
should not be pressed and held.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
2
1
4
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Record Zone  
Shift  
Activates and deactivates standby mode when the MC-12 is powered on with the rear panel power  
switch. The standby button performs no function when the MC-12 is powered off with the rear  
panel power switch. When standby mode is activated, pressing the standby button deactivates  
standby mode and activates the MC-12, including all zones that were activated during the previous  
operating session. When standby mode is deactivated, pressing the standby button activates standby  
mode and deactivates the MC-12. The red front panel standby button LED lights to indicate that  
standby mode is activated.  
1
MAIN  
ZONE  
REC  
3
SHIFT  
DVD-1  
DVD-2  
SAT  
L D  
TV  
CD  
VCR  
GAME  
AUX  
PVR  
Note: Power is still supplied to the MC-12 when standby mode is activated.  
TAPE  
TUNER  
Activates the remote control back-light, illuminating remote control buttons to make them more  
visible in the dark. The back-light also activates whenever a remote control button is pressed. No  
matter how the back-light is activated, it automatically fades about 5 seconds after the last remote  
control command is received.  
2
3
FP  
MODE  
BLUE  
OSD  
VOL  
Activates the Main Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Main Zone.  
MAIN  
STAT  
MUTE  
Activates the Zone 2 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 2 and the Main  
Zone.  
ZONE  
REC  
MENU  
Activates the Record Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Record and  
Main Zones.  
7 / 5  
2 CH  
Activates the Shift command bank, which includes commands that control the Main Zone.  
SHIFT  
MUSIC  
Selects the DVD1 input Selects the DVD1 input Selects the DVD1 input Deactivates the Main  
D VD -1  
4
for the Main Zone.  
for Zone 2.  
for the Record Zone.  
Zone.  
Selects the DVD2 input Selects the DVD2 input Selects the DVD2 input Deactivates Zone 2.  
for the Main Zone.  
for Zone 2.  
for the Record Zone.  
D VD -2  
L D  
Selects the LD input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the LD input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the LD input  
for the Record Zone.  
Deactivates the Record  
Zone.  
Selects the TV input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the TV input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the TV input  
for the Record Zone.  
Sets the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
LOUDNESS parameter  
to ON.  
T V  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Record Zone  
Shift  
Selects the SAT input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the SAT input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the SAT input  
for the Record Zone.  
Sets the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
LOUDNESS parameter  
to OFF.  
SA T  
4
MAIN  
ZONE  
REC  
SHIFT  
DVD-1  
DVD-2  
SAT  
L D  
Selects the VCR input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the VCR input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the VCR input  
for the Record Zone.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
VC R  
C D  
TV  
CD  
VCR  
GAME  
AUX  
4
Selects the CD input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the CD input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the CD input  
for the Record Zone.  
Increases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
BASS parameter in  
0.5dB increments.  
PVR  
TAPE  
TUNER  
FP  
Selects the PVR input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the PVR input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the PVR input  
for the Record Zone.  
Increases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
TREBLE parameter in  
0.5dB increments.  
MODE  
BLUE  
OSD  
VOL  
PV R  
G A ME  
TA PE  
TUNER  
A UX  
STAT  
MUTE  
Selects the GAME input Selects the GAME input Selects the GAME input Increases the AUDIO  
for the Main Zone.  
for Zone 2.  
for the Record Zone.  
CONTROLS menu  
TILT EQ parameter in  
0.2dB increments.  
MENU  
7 / 5  
2 CH  
Selects the TAPE input Selects the TAPE input Selects the TAPE input Decreases the AUDIO  
for the Main Zone.  
for Zone 2.  
for the Record Zone.  
CONTROLS menu  
BASS parameter in  
0.5dB increments.  
MUSIC  
Selects the TUNER  
input for the Main  
Zone.  
Selects the TUNER  
input for Zone 2.  
Selects the TUNER  
input for the Record  
Zone.  
Decreases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
TREBLE parameter in  
0.5dB increments.  
Selects the AUX input  
for the Main Zone.  
Selects the AUX input  
for Zone 2.  
Selects the AUX input  
for the Record Zone.  
Decreases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
TILT EQ parameter in  
0.2dB increments.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Record Zone  
Shift  
Toggles the FRONT  
PANEL DISPLAY menu  
STATUS parameter  
between ALWAYS OFF  
and its current setting.  
Sets Zone 2 volume  
level to -15dB.  
Sets Record Zone  
volume level to -15dB. volume level to -15dB.  
Sets Main Zone  
FP  
5
MAIN  
ZONE  
REC  
SHIFT  
DVD-1  
DVD-2  
SAT  
L D  
Toggles the ON-  
SCREEN DISPLAY  
menu BACKGROUND  
parameter between  
ON and OFF.  
Sets Zone 2 volume  
level to -30dB.  
Sets Record Zone  
volume level to -30dB. volume level to -30dB.  
Sets Main Zone  
TV  
CD  
VCR  
GAME  
AUX  
BLUE  
6
7
8
PVR  
TAPE  
TUNER  
5
8
6
9
FP  
Toggles the ON-  
SCREEN DISPLAY menu expansion.  
STATUS parameter  
between ALWAYS OFF  
and its current setting.  
Reserved for future  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Sets the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
BASS, TREBLE, and  
TILT EQ parameters to  
+0.0dB  
O SD  
MODE  
BLUE  
OSD  
VOL  
7
STAT  
MUTE  
10  
Scroll to the previous  
and next available  
listening mode,  
Activates (+) and  
deactivates (–) the  
trigger output  
Activates(+) and  
deactivates (–) the  
trigger output  
Activates (+) and  
deactivates (–) standby  
mode when the  
MODE  
MENU  
auditioning listening  
modes with the  
current Main Zone  
connector labeled 1  
when the connector is when the connector is with the rear panel  
configured for remote configured for remote power switch. This  
connector labeled 2  
MC-12 is powered on  
7 / 5  
2 CH  
input source. Scrolling operation.  
occurs in the order  
shown on the MODE  
ADJUST menu.  
operation.  
button performs no  
function when the  
MC-12 is powered off  
with the rear panel  
power switch.  
MUSIC  
Increases and  
Increases and  
Increases and  
Increases and  
9
decreases Main Zone  
volume level in 1dB  
increments.  
decreases Zone 2  
volume level in 1dB  
increments.  
decreases Record  
Zone volume level in  
1dB increments.  
decreases Main Zone  
volume level in 3dB  
increments.  
VOL  
Toggles between  
lowering Main Zone  
volume level and  
restoring Main Zone  
volume to its original  
level.  
Toggles between fully  
muting Zone 2 volume muting Record Zone  
level and restoring  
Zone 2 volume to its  
original level.  
Toggles between fully  
Toggles between fully  
muting Main Zone  
volume level and  
MUTE  
10  
volume level and  
restoring Record Zone restoring Main Zone  
volume to its original  
level.  
volume to its original  
level.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Record Zone  
Shift  
Displays the Main  
Zone two-line status  
for 2 seconds.  
Displays the Zone 2  
two-line status for 2  
seconds.  
Displays the Record  
Zone two-line status  
for 2 seconds.  
Opens and closes the  
status menu for the  
current input source.  
S T A T  
11  
MAIN  
ZONE  
REC  
SHIFT  
When a menu is open, Centers the AUDIO  
Centers the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
RECORD BALANCE  
parameter.  
Centers the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
Main Zone BALANCE  
and FADER parameters.  
DVD-1  
DVD-2  
SAT  
L D  
MENU  
12  
13  
pressing the MENU  
button closes the  
CONTROLS menu  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
TV  
CD  
VCR  
GAME  
AUX  
menu structure. When parameter.  
no menus are open,  
pressing the MENU  
button opens the  
MAIN MENU.  
PVR  
TAPE  
TUNER  
FP  
Closes the current  
menu (ꢃ) or opens  
the menu structure  
and selects the  
Adjust the AUDIO  
Adjust the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
RECORD BALANCE  
parameter left and  
right.  
Adjust the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
Main Zone BALANCE  
parameter left and  
right.  
MODE  
BLUE  
OSD  
VOL  
CONTROLS menu  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
parameter left and  
right.  
11  
12  
STAT  
MUTE  
highlighted menu  
item (ꢂ).  
13  
14  
13  
15  
MENU  
Scroll upward and  
downward through  
menu items.  
Increase and decrease  
subwoofer output  
levels applied to the  
current listening  
mode.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Adjust the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu  
Main Zone FADER  
parameter forward (ꢀ)  
and backward (ꢁ).  
7 / 5  
2 CH  
MUSIC  
Toggles between  
7- and 5-channel  
playback. Refer to  
page 3-31 for more  
information.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Adjusts the MAIN ADV  
menu INPUT SELECT  
parameter, cycling  
through the ANALOG,  
DIGITAL, and AUTO  
settings.  
7 / 5  
14  
15  
Toggles between the  
current listening mode expansion.  
and the 2-CHANNEL  
Reserved for future  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Toggles the MAIN  
ADV menu ANALOG  
BYPASS parameter  
between ON and OFF.  
2 C H  
listening mode.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Button  
16  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Record Zone  
Shift  
Selects the THX mode Reserved for future  
family for the current  
input source.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Activates the 5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, or 5.1  
expansion.  
MAIN  
ZONE  
REC  
SHIFT  
listening mode when  
a 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source is  
present.  
DVD-1  
DVD-2  
SAT  
L D  
TV  
CD  
VCR  
GAME  
AUX  
Selects the Dolby  
mode family for the  
current input source.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Activates the DIGITAL  
EX or DIGITAL  
listening mode when  
a 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source is  
PVR  
TAPE  
TUNER  
FP  
present.  
MODE  
BLUE  
OSD  
VOL  
Selects the LOGIC7  
Film mode family for  
the current input  
source.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Activates the  
PANORAMA listening  
mode.  
STAT  
MUTE  
MENU  
Selects the LOGIC7 TV Reserved for future  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Activates the MONO  
LOGIC listening mode  
for 2-channel sources  
and the 5.1 MONO  
LOGIC listening mode  
for 5.1-channel  
mode family for the  
current input source.  
expansion.  
7 / 5  
2 CH  
16  
sources.  
MUSIC  
Selects the dts mode  
family for the current  
input source.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
When a dts(-ES) source  
is present, pressing  
the dts button toggles  
the  
DECODING  
parameter, cycling  
through the AUTO,  
ON, and OFF settings.  
Selects the LOGIC7  
Music mode family for expansion.  
the current input  
Reserved for future  
Reserved for future  
expansion.  
Activates the  
SURR listening mode.  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
source.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
3. When the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN  
parameter is set to ANLG, the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio  
output connectors are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS  
listening mode is activated. However, it is possible to have a  
5.1-channel analog audio source present in the Main Zone and  
a digital audio source present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone.  
UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES  
The MC-12 features three zones of operation, called the Main  
Zone, Zone 2, and the Record Zone. The Main Zone controls audio  
and video sources in the primary listening space. Zone 2 controls  
audio and video sources in the secondary listening space. And, the  
Record Zone controls audio and video sources sent to recording  
devices or to a third listening space.  
TWO-LINE STATUS  
These zones have separate digital audio receivers and dedicated  
analog source selectors that allow for independent input selection  
in each zone. The MC-12 can process input sources in three zones  
at the same time. For instance, the MC-12 can play a DVD in the  
Main Zone, while playing a CD in Zone 2, while sending satellite  
receiver signals to a VCR in the Record Zone.  
The two-line status opens on the on-screen and front panel displays  
whenever the MC-12 detects a status change such as a new input  
source or listening mode. The information included on the two-line  
status differs depending on the zone in which the MC-12 last  
detected a status change. For instance, the Main Zone two-line  
status opens when a Main Zone status change is detected.  
The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:  
Main Zone Two-Line Status  
Opens on the on-screen and front panel  
displays whenever the MC-12 detects a Main  
Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line  
status indicates the current input, listening mode, input source,  
and volume level selected in the Main Zone.  
1. When a Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) source is present in the Main  
Zone, the same Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) source can also be  
present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone. However, a different  
Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) source cannot be present in Zone 2 or  
the Record Zone.  
DVD1  
L7 FILM  
%!D  
VOL  
-34dB  
2. Main Zone multi-channel audio can be downmixed in Zone 2  
or the Record Zone when all of the following conditions are  
met:  
Zone 2 Two-Line Status  
Opens on the on-screen and front panel  
displays whenever the MC-12 detects a Zone 2  
status change. The Zone 2 two-line status  
indicates the current input, input source, and volume level selected  
in Zone 2.  
DVD1  
ZONE2  
%!D  
VOL  
-34dB  
•
A Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) source is present in the Main  
Zone.  
•
The Main Zone input is also selected in Zone 2 or the  
Record Zone. For instance, if the DVD1 input is selected in  
the Main Zone, the DVD1 input must also be selected in  
Zone 2 or the Record Zone.  
. . . Two-Line Status continues on page 2-20  
•
The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN  
parameter is set to DMIX.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Two-Line Status (continued from page 2-19)  
STATUS MENUS  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote  
control STAT button opens the status menu for the current input  
source. Status menus are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,  
dts(-ES), analog, and digital sources. All status menus are shown at  
the top of the next page.  
Record Zone Two-Line Status  
Opens on the on-screen and front panel  
displays whenever the MC-12 detects a  
Record Zone status change. The Record Zone  
DVD1  
RECORD  
%!D  
VOL  
-34dB  
two-line status indicates the current input, input source, and  
volume level selected in the Record Zone.  
Status menu parameters provide information about the current  
input source and listening mode. Some status menus also include  
level meters that indicate fluctuating audio input levels. Refer to  
page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter can be used to  
control the length of time for which the two-line status appears on  
the on-screen and front panel displays. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
menu POSITION parameter can be used to control the vertical  
alignment of the two-line status on the display device screen.  
Note:  
Status menu parameters provide information about  
the current input source and listening mode. These  
parameters cannot be adjusted.  
Note:  
On-screen display menus – including the two-line  
status – will not appear on the display device screen  
when the display device is connected to the  
component video output connector and the MAIN  
ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set to  
OFF.  
Unlike most other menus, status menus cannot be opened through  
the selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control  
command sequence outlined below must be used.  
To open and navigate the status menu for the current input  
source:  
1. Press and release the remote control SHIFT button to activate  
the Shift command bank.  
2. Press and release the remote control STAT button. The first  
page of the status menu for the current input source will open  
on the on-screen and front panel displays. If the status menu  
includes a second page, the PG1 indicator appears in the top-  
right corner of the menu. Press the STAT button again to open  
the second page. If the status menu does not include a second  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
2CH STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
D STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
D STATUS  
PG2  
STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
STATUS  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
PG2  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
EX ENCODED  
CENTER MIX LVL  
SURR MIX LVL  
ENCODING  
dB  
dB  
dB  
0
-6  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45  
-45  
-45  
5.1 ANALOG STATUS  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
DIGITAL STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
INPUT TYPE  
INPUT TYPE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45  
page, pressing the STAT button again will close the menu. If  
this occurs, begin again with step 1.  
2CH STATUS  
•
•
Provides information about 2-channel sources.  
Includes L and R level meters.  
3. When the desired status menu page has been opened, press  
the remote control ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to scroll upward  
and downward through all status menu parameters included  
on the open page.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
4. Press the STAT button to close the status menu. In some cases,  
the STAT button must be pressed twice in succession to close  
the status menu.  
The current input  
MODE  
The current listening mode  
ANLG, PCM  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
D STATUS  
STATUS  
•Provides information about Dolby Digital sources.  
•
•
Provides information about dts(-ES) sources.  
• Includes L, C, R, SL, SR, and LFE level meters.  
Includes L, C, R, SL, SR, SB, and LFE level meters.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The current input  
The current listening mode  
3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0  
32 to 640kbps  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The current input  
MODE  
MODE  
The current listening mode  
3/3.1, 3/2.1  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
754.5 to 1509.7kbps  
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF  
16bits, 20bits, 24bits  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
EX ENCODED  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
ON, OFF  
ENCODING  
48kHz  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
MATRIX, NONE  
-27 to +4dB  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
SMALL, LARGE  
CENTER MIX LVL -3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB  
SURR MIX LVL +0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
5.1 ANALOG STATUS  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
•
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog sources.  
•
Provides information about 2-channel analog sources when the  
MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.  
•
Includes L, C, R, SL, SR, and LFE level meters.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The current input  
2CH BYPASS  
The current input  
MODE  
The current listening mode  
ANLG  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
INPUT TYPE  
BYPASS  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
DIGITAL STATUS  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
•
Provides information about digital sources for which a sample  
rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.  
•
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog sources when  
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The current input  
5.1a BYPASS  
The current input  
MODE  
The current listening mode  
---  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
INPUT TYPE  
BYPASS  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
Refer to page 2-24 for status menu parameter descriptions.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Lexicon  
Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources include 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1,  
2/2, 2/1, 2/0, and 1/0. Current settings for dts(-ES) sources include  
3/3.1 and 3/2.1.  
STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS  
2.0 ENCODING  
MATRIX, NONE  
Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.  
When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is  
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded  
source is not detected. The MC-12 cannot automatically detect  
matrix encoding in non-flagged input sources.  
DIALOG OFFSET  
-27 to +4dB  
Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.  
Dolby Digital sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full-  
scale (-27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the  
incoming signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter  
indicates the amount of adjustment the MC-12 makes to normalize  
dialog to -27dBFS.  
BIT RATE  
32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps  
Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit  
rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding  
process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32  
to 640 kbps. Possible settings for dts(-ES) sources range from 754  
to 1509.7kbps.  
ENCODING  
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF  
Indicates whether or not a dts-ES-encoded source is detected.  
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel  
dts-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,  
a 5.1-channel dts-ES source with a surround-encoded back channel  
is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard dts  
source with no dts-ES encoding is detected.  
CENTER MIX LVL  
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB  
Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used  
during the mixing process.  
EX ENCODED  
MATRIX, NONE  
CHANNELS  
3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0  
Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded  
source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital  
Surround EX-encoding is detected. When the parameter setting is  
NONE, a standard 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded  
without Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoding is detected. The  
MC-12 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoding in non-flagged input sources.  
Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The  
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit  
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.  
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low-  
frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter  
setting is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two  
surround channels, and LFE information is present.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MC-12  
INPUT  
WORD LENGTH  
16bits, 20bits, 24bits  
Indicates the current input (i.e. DVD1).  
Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input  
signal.  
INPUT TYPE  
ANLG, BYP, PCM, ---  
Status Menu Level Meters  
Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter  
setting is ANLG, an analog audio source is present and the MAIN  
ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF. When the  
parameter setting is BYP, an analog audio source is present and the  
ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. When the parameter  
setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio source is present. When  
the parameter setting is ---, a sample rate is detected, but no audio  
is detected in the digital audio input signal.  
Most status menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating  
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround  
left (SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB), and LFE (LFE)  
channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog  
and digital audio sources. For instance, the level meters indicate  
digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.  
Different combinations of level meters appear on each status  
menu, depending on the input source that is present. The SB level  
meter appears when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a  
MIX ROOM  
SMALL, LARGE  
Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the  
mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, it is  
recommended to set the RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for  
THX listening modes.  
5.1-channel source is present and the  
set to ON.  
DECODING parameter is  
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow, and red  
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen  
background. Green indicates low input levels, yellow indicates  
normal input levels, and red indicates high input levels and the  
onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when the on-screen  
display is not configured for a blue-screen background.  
MODE  
Indicates the current (activated) listening mode (i.e. L7 FILM).  
SAMPLE RATE  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.  
SURR MIX LVL  
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB  
Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during  
the mixing process.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
SETUP  
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Changing Input Names • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors • Selecting  
Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Input Settings  
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
Setting Crossover Points • Calibrating Speaker Distances & Output Levels •  
Automatic Calibration • Manual Calibration • Setting Bass Peak Limiters  
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58  
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59  
On-Screen Display • Front Panel Display  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64  
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65  
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SETUP  
Selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option opens the SETUP menu  
shown below, which can be used to configure the MC-12.  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu, which can be used to  
configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo  
connectors or as five stereo and one 5.1-channel connectors. Refer  
to page 3-58 for more information.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which can be used to customize  
the on-screen and front panel displays, restore audio/video  
synchronization, and create and activate a custom unit name. Refer  
to page 3-59 for more information.  
INPUTS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
Prompts the selection of the desired input (i.e. DVD1). Selecting an  
input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which can be  
used to change input names, assign audio and video input  
connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure  
advanced Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone input settings.  
Refer to the next page for more information.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which can be used to  
configure Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone volume levels.  
Refer to page 3-64 for more information.  
SPEAKERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
TRIGGERS  
Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure  
the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker  
setup. Refer to page 3-21 for more information.  
SETUP  
TRIGGERS  
Prompts the selection of the desired trigger output connector (1 or  
2). Selecting a connector opens the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP  
menu, which can be used to configure the selected connector for  
remote or program operation. Refer to page 3-65 for more  
information.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown below as an example, and  
will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section.  
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be  
substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step  
in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which can be used to protect  
MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP menu branch  
parameter settings from accidental changes. Refer to page 3-66 for  
more information.  
All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6.  
The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are  
identical regardless of which input is selected. The parameter  
settings on the right side are adjustable. The INPUT SETUP menus  
shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings  
for each input.  
INPUT SETUP  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of  
the desired input (i.e. DVD1). Selecting an input opens the  
corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which can be used to change  
input names, assign audio and video input connectors, select  
preferred listening modes, and configure advanced Main Zone,  
Zone 2, and Record Zone input settings.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
CHANGING INPUT NAMES  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME option opens the INPUT NAME menu shown below, which can be used to customize or restore the  
factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection button  
labels.  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
DVD-1  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
DVD-1  
D  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
^
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS  
AUTO  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu opens, locate  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
the current input name on the second line of the drop-down  
menu. The cursor automatically appears beneath the first  
character in the current input name.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu shown above,  
which can be used to customize the name of the selected input.  
Custom input names can include up to eight characters.  
3. When the current input name is located, use the following  
remote control commands to enter the desired input name:  
•
Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to change the character  
above the cursor.  
To customize the name of the selected input:  
•
Press the ꢂ arrow button to advance to the next character  
space. The cursor will automatically wrap to the first  
character space when the last (eighth) character space is  
passed.  
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path shown above to  
open the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
•
Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to the previous  
character space. When the cursor is positioned in the first  
character space, pressing the ꢃ arrow button will close the  
EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu.  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-  
default input names correspond to front panel and remote control  
input selection button labels.  
4. When the desired input name has been entered, press the ꢃ  
arrow button until the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu  
closes.  
To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:  
1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path shown above  
to select the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option. When the  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is selected, the message  
“PRESS MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears on the  
on-screen and front panel displays as shown below.  
The custom input name appears on the on-screen and front panel  
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear  
on the menu that prompts the selection of the desired input. The  
custom input name appears against the left margin of the on-  
screen display, and the factory-default input name appears in  
parentheses against the right margin of the on-screen display.  
2. When this message appears, press the ꢂ arrow button to  
restore the factory-default name of the selected input. (Press  
the ꢃ arrow button to close the message without restoring the  
factory-default name of the selected input.)  
PRESS MENU V TO  
RESTORE INPUT NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
DVD-1  
D  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
ASSIGNING AUDIO & VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS  
The MC-12 has 12 configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its 13 digital audio, 8 analog audio, 5 composite video, 8 S-video,  
or 4 component video input connectors.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 DIGITAL IN  
COAX-1  
COAX-2  
COAX-3  
COAX-4  
COAX-5  
COAX-6  
OPTICAL-1  
OPTICAL-2  
OPTICAL-3  
OPTICAL-4  
OPTICAL-5  
OPTICAL-6  
AES/EBU  
NONE  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that  
DIGITAL IN  
COAX-1 to 6, OPTICAL-1 to 6, AES/EBU, NONE  
can be used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG  
IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel analog audio  
input levels for the selected input.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
Opens the DIGITAL IN menu shown above, which can be used to  
assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input. A  
digital audio input connector must be assigned if no analog audio  
input connector is assigned.  
Parameter  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
Possible Settings  
COAX-1 to 6, OPTICAL-1 to 6, AES/EBU, NONE  
ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (6-8), NONE  
AUTO, -18 to +12dB  
Note:  
The digital audio input connectors are compatible with  
PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and  
dts(-ES) sources. The digital audio input connectors  
are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources.  
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 8, NONE  
COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 4, NONE  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the MC-12  
automatically sets the:  
The configuration of the analog audio input connectors determines  
available ANALOG IN parameter settings. The settings shown on  
menu A (below) are available when the analog audio input  
connectors are configured as eight stereo connectors. The settings  
shown on menu B (below) are available when the analog audio  
input connectors are configured as five stereo and one 5.1-channel  
connectors.  
•
•
•
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG  
INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG  
INPUT SETUP menu RECORD IN parameter to ANLG  
When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the MC-12  
automatically sets the:  
ANALOG IN  
ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (6-8), NONE  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANALOG IN  
•
•
•
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL  
INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL  
INPUT SETUP menu RECORD IN parameter to DIGITAL  
Opens the ANALOG IN menu shown below, which can be used to  
assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input. An  
analog audio input connector must be assigned if no digital audio  
input connector is assigned.  
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-8  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
OR  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
ANALOG-6  
ANALOG-7  
ANALOG-8  
NONE  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
5.1 ANLG (6-8)  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
A
B
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-7)  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
ON  
+0dB  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
-18 to +12dB  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
AUTO GAIN  
+0.0dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
-45  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
Parameter  
AUTO  
Possible Settings  
ON, OFF  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO, -18 to +12dB  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu shown above, which can be used to  
adjust 2-channel analog audio input levels for the selected input.  
Despite attempts at standardization, analog sources still have a  
wide range of input levels. To compensate for this, the MC-12  
allows independent input level adjustment for each of its stereo  
analog audio input connectors. Input level adjustment is not  
available for the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector.  
MANUAL  
AUTO GAIN*  
-18 to +12dB  
-18 to +12dB  
* This parameter cannot be adjusted.  
Note:  
ANLG IN LVL menu adjustments are applied to the  
stereo analog audio input connector assigned for the  
selected input. When another stereo analog audio  
input connector is assigned, these adjustments are  
automatically applied to the new connector.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
AUTO  
ON, OFF  
AUTO GAIN  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO GAIN  
Activates automatic adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input  
levels. When ON is selected, the MC-12 automatically monitors  
and optimizes 2-channel analog audio input levels. When the input  
signal is too high, the MC-12 quickly decreases input levels to avoid  
overload. When the input signal is too low, the MC-12 slowly  
increases input levels to maximize signal-to-noise ratio and  
dynamic range.  
Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the  
assigned stereo analog audio input connector. When the AUTO  
parameter is set to ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the  
amount of adjustment being applied until automatic adjustments  
are made. Then, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount  
of automatic input level adjustment being applied.  
When the AUTO parameter is set to OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter  
indicates the amount of manual adjustment being applied. (In  
other words, the AUTO GAIN parameter reflects the MANUAL  
parameter setting.)  
When OFF is selected, the MC-12 does not automatically monitor  
and optimize 2-channel analog audio input levels. The MANUAL  
parameter is available for manual input level adjustment.  
MANUAL  
-18 to +12dB  
LEVEL METERS  
Indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left (L) and front right  
(R) channels for the selected input. Like status menu level meters,  
ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate input levels for both digital  
and analog audio sources. However, ANLG IN LVL menu input level  
adjustment only affects 2-channel analog audio sources.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
MANUAL  
Allows manual adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input levels.  
When the MANUAL parameter setting is adjusted, the MC-12  
automatically sets the AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating  
automatic input level adjustment. When the AUTO parameter is set  
to ON, manual input level adjustments are retained (though not  
applied).  
When the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen  
background, level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow,  
and red. Green indicates low input levels, yellow indicates normal  
input levels, and red indicates high input levels and the onset of  
overload. When the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-  
screen background, level meters appear in white.  
Note:  
When the AUTO parameter is set to ON, the MC-12  
will not make automatic input level adjustments that  
exceed the MANUAL parameter setting.  
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-10  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-9)  
VIDEO IN  
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 8, NONE  
COMPONENT IN  
COMPONENT-1 to 4  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
VIDEO IN  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
COMPONENT IN  
Opens the VIDEO IN menu shown below, which can be used to  
assign a composite or S-video input connector for the selected  
input.  
Opens the COMPONENT menu shown at the top of the next page,  
which can be used to assign a component video input connector  
for the selected input.  
Note:  
Note:  
•
Composite video output connectors are available  
when a composite or S-video source is present.  
•
Component video output connectors are only  
available when a component video source is  
present.  
•
S-video output connectors are available when an  
S-video source is present.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 VIDEO IN  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
COMPOSITE-1  
COMPOSITE-2  
COMPOSITE-3  
COMPOSITE-4  
COMPOSITE-5  
S-VIDEO-1  
S-VIDEO-2  
S-VIDEO-3  
S-VIDEO-4  
S-VIDEO-5  
S-VIDEO-6  
S-VIDEO-7  
S-VIDEO-8  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 COMPONENT  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
COMPONENT-1  
COMPONENT-2  
COMPONENT-3  
COMPONENT-4  
CD  
COAX-4  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
1
MUSIC  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
D
5.1 MUSIC  
MUSIC  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
When a preferred listening mode is selected, the MC-12  
automatically activates that listening mode whenever a new input  
is selected or an appropriate input source is present. For instance,  
the DVD1 and CD INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode  
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES  
The MC-12 allows the selection of four preferred listening modes  
for each Main Zone input, including one listening mode each for  
2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and 5.1-channel analog sources.  
The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that  
can be used to select preferred listening modes.  
selection parameters are set as shown above.  
•
If the DVD1 input is selected while a 2-channel source is  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the FILM  
listening mode. If a 5.1-channel analog source becomes  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the 5.1a FILM  
listening mode.  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters  
2-CH  
Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel  
•
If the CD input is selected while a Dolby Digital source is  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the 5.1 MUSIC  
listening mode. If the DVD1 input is then selected while a  
dts(-ES) source is present, the MC-12 will automatically activate  
sources  
D
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital  
sources  
the  
FILM listening mode.  
Selects a preferred listening mode for dts(-ES)  
sources  
. . . Selecting Preferred Listening Modes continues on page 3-12  
5.1a  
Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel  
analog sources  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes (continued from page 3-11)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and  
will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section.  
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be  
substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step  
in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DVD1 5.1a MODE  
DVD1 2-CH MODE  
DVD1  
MODE  
DVD1  
D MODE  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1a  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
USE LAST  
FILM  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
FILM  
MUSIC  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
5.1 MUSIC  
5.1  
2-CHAN  
DIGITAL  
USE LAST  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
USE LAST  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
2-CH  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
2-CH  
Opens the 2-CH MODE menu shown above, which can be used to select a preferred listening mode for 2-channel  
sources. The MC-12 automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present. When  
the USE LAST setting is selected, the MC-12 automatically activates the 2-channel listening mode that was activated the  
last time a 2-channel source was present.  
USE LAST  
R
The  
listening modes cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources. However, when  
R
R
the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the MC-12 will activate a  
listening mode if a  
listening mode  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
was activated the last time a 2-channel source was present. The  
R
MC-12 will not activate a  
48kHz PCM digital source is present. The  
listening mode unless a 44.1 or  
R
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
@@@!  
listening modes  
are not compatible with 88.2 or 96kHz, Dolby Digital, or analog  
sources.  
Opens the  
MODE menu shown on the previous page, which  
can be used to select a preferred listening mode for dts(-ES)  
sources. The MC-12 automatically activates the selected listening  
mode whenever a dts(-ES) source is present. When the USE LAST  
setting is selected, the MC-12 automatically activates the dts(-ES)  
listening mode that was activated the last time a dts(-ES) source  
was present.  
Note:  
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the  
MC-12 will not activate the 2-CHANNEL listening  
mode if the 2CH button was used to activate the  
2-CHANNEL listening mode the last time a 2-channel  
source was present. Instead, the MC-12 will activate  
the listening mode that was activated prior to the  
2-CHANNEL listening mode.  
The  
MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the  
preferred listening mode for dts(-ES) sources. However, when the  
parameter is set to USE LAST, the MC-12 will activate the  
MUSIC listening mode if this listening mode was  
activated the last time a dts(-ES) source was present.  
D
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
@*D  
5.1a  
Opens the D MODE menu shown on the previous page, which  
can be used to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital  
sources. The MC-12 automatically activates the selected listening  
mode whenever a Dolby Digital source is present. When the USE  
LAST setting is selected, the MC-12 automatically activates the  
Dolby Digital listening mode that was activated the last time a  
Dolby Digital source was present.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
5.1a  
Opens the 5.1a MODE menu shown on the previous page, which  
can be used to select a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel  
analog sources. The MC-12 automatically activates the selected  
listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog source is present.  
When the USE LAST setting is selected, the MC-12 automatically  
activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was activated  
the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.  
The 5.1  
MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the  
preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources. However, when  
the D parameter is set to USE LAST, the MC-12 will activate the  
The 5.1a  
MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the  
preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. However,  
when the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST, the MC-12 will activate  
the 5.1a  
5.1  
MUSIC listening mode if this listening mode was activated  
the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.  
MUSIC listening mode if this listening mode was  
activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
OFF  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
ON  
OFF  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
DMIX  
RECORD ADVANCED  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The MC-12 allows the assignment of one digital and one analog  
audio input connector for each input. The table below indicates the  
INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to control the  
interaction of these connectors, as well as other advanced Main  
Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone input settings.  
MAIN ADVANCED  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens  
the MAIN ADV menu shown above, which can be used to control  
the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors  
assigned for the selected Main Zone input as well as configure  
other advanced Main Zone input settings.  
Parameter  
Possible Settings  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
Refer to the next column  
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX  
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX  
All MAIN ADV menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-8. The  
parameters on the left side of the MAIN ADV menus are identical  
regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the  
right side are adjustable. The MAIN ADV menus shown in the  
Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each  
input.  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED Refer to page 3-19  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
Parameter  
Possible Settings  
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO  
ON, OFF  
•
When a 5.1-channel analog source is present, the MC-12  
passes analog input signals to the Main Zone audio output  
connectors as indicated in the table on pages 2-7 and 3-58.  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
AUTO, OFF  
When OFF is selected, the MC-12 sends analog input signals  
through A/D conversion and internal processing before passing  
them to the Main Zone audio output connectors. This allows  
analog sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers,  
speaker distance calibration, and tone controls.  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ON, OFF  
ON, OFF  
INPUT SELECT  
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO  
Note:  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
INPUT SELECT  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing  
the 2CH button toggles the ANALOG BYPASS  
parameter between the ON and OFF settings.  
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input  
connectors assigned for the selected Main Zone input. The table on  
the next page describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings.  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
AUTO, OFF  
Note:  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
When the Shift command bank is activated, the 7/5  
button can be used to adjust the INPUT SELECT  
parameter, cycling through the DIGITAL, ANALOG,  
and AUTO settings.  
Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some  
video sources. When AUTO is selected, the MC-12 passes  
anamorphic video input signals through the S-video switcher,  
enabling compatible display devices to automatically switch  
between anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.  
ANALOG BYPASS  
ON, OFF  
When OFF is selected, the MC-12 does not pass anamorphic video  
input signals through the S-video switcher, preventing compatible  
display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic  
and non-anamorphic display modes.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ANALOG BYPASS  
Allows analog sources to bypass A/D conversion and internal  
processing. When ON is selected, the MC-12 passes analog input  
signals directly to the Main Zone audio output connectors.  
•
When a 2-channel analog source is present, the MC-12 passes  
analog input signals directly to the Front L/R output  
connectors.  
. . . Configuring Advanced Input Settings continues on page 3-16  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Configuring Advanced Input Settings (continued from page 3-15)  
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
The MC-12 sends the assigned digital audio The MC-12 sends the assigned analog audio The MC-12 toggles between sending the assigned  
input connector to the Main Zone audio output input connector to the Main Zone audio output digital and analog audio input connectors to the Main  
connectors. The MC-12 ignores the assigned connectors. The MC-12 ignores the assigned Zone audio output connectors based on the input  
analog audio input connector.  
digital audio input connector.  
source that is present.  
Note the following:  
Note the following:  
For example:  
•
When an incompatible digital source is  
present, the MC-12 automatically selects  
the assigned analog audio input connector.  
The digital audio input connectors are  
compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and  
96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES)  
sources. The digital audio input connectors  
are not compatible with MPEG or MP3  
sources.  
•
The MC-12 automatically sets the INPUT  
SELECT parameter to ANALOG when no  
digital audio input connector is assigned.  
•
The MC-12 selects the assigned digital audio input  
connector when a compatible digital source is  
present. The MC-12 will not select the assigned  
analog audio input connector when a compatible  
digital source is present.  
•
The INPUT SETUP menu ANALOG IN  
parameter can be used to assign an analog  
audio input connector for the selected  
input.  
•
•
The MC-12 selects the assigned analog audio input  
connector when an incompatible digital source is  
present.  
The MC-12 selects the assigned analog audio input  
connector when an analog source, such as an  
SACD, is present.  
•
•
The MC-12 automatically sets the INPUT  
SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when no  
analog audio input connector is assigned.  
The INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN  
parameter can be used to assign a digital  
audio input connector for the selected  
input.  
Note the following:  
•
The MC-12 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT  
parameter to AUTO when both digital and analog  
audio input connectors are assigned.  
•
The AUTO setting is recommended for components  
that generate both digital and analog input signals,  
such as DVD/SACD players.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
COMPONENT OSD  
ON, OFF  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
COMPONENT OSD  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display  
device is connected to the Main Zone component video output  
connector. When ON is selected, the on-screen display appears as  
a 480i video input signal on a full blue-screen background. To  
minimize viewing distractions, the two-line status does not appear  
on the on-screen display. When OFF is selected, the on-screen  
display – including the two-line status – is not available.  
Controls the on-screen display aspect ratio when the display device  
is connected to a Main Zone S-video output connector. Aspect  
ratio refers to the size of the picture or the display device screen. A  
4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A 16:9 aspect ratio, often referred  
to as widescreen, is almost twice as wide as high.  
When ON is selected, the on-screen display appears in a 4:3 aspect  
ratio regardless of the incoming video input signal. When OFF is  
selected, the on-screen display appears in the same aspect ratio as  
the incoming video input signal.  
Note:  
When the display device is connected to the Main  
Zone component video output connector, the  
on-screen display automatically deactivates when  
the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND  
parameter is set to OFF.  
Note:  
When a 16:9 (widescreen) display device is connected  
to a Main Zone S-video output connector, the  
on-screen display will appear horizontally stretched  
across the display device screen if the S-VIDEO OSD  
4:3 parameter is set to OFF and an anamorphic video  
input signal is present.  
ZONE2 & RECORD IN  
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX  
When the ZONE2 or RECORD IN parameter is set to DIGITAL  
CAUTION  
or ANLG, the MC-12 recognizes some dts-encoded sources  
as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs loud digital  
noise from the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output  
connectors.  
OR  
RECORD IN  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ZONE2 IN  
Control the interaction of the digital and analog audio input  
connectors assigned for the selected Zone 2 and Record Zone  
inputs. The table on the next page describes ZONE2 and RECORD  
IN parameter setting.  
. . . Configuring Advanced Input Settings continues on page 3-18  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Configuring Advanced Input Settings (continued from page 3-17)  
ZONE2 & RECORD IN Parameter Settings  
DIGITAL  
ANLG (Analog)  
DMIX (Downmix)  
The MC-12 sends the assigned digital The MC-12 sends the assigned analog The MC-12 sends a downmixed version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2  
audio input connector to the Zone 2 or audio input connector to the Zone 2 or or Record Zone audio output connectors. Independent zone monitoring is  
Record Zone audio output connectors. Record Zone audio output connectors. not available. Downmixing is available when all of the following conditions  
The MC-12 ignores the assigned analog The MC-12 ignores the assigned digital are met:  
audio input connector. Independent audio input connector. Independent  
•
The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and Zone 2 or in  
the Main Zone and the Record Zone. Otherwise, the Zone 2 or Record  
Zone audio output connectors will mute.  
zone monitoring is available.  
zone monitoring is available.  
Note the following:  
Note the following:  
•
•
A Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) source must be present.  
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode must not be activated.  
•
The MC-12 passes digital sources  
to all Zone 2 or Record Zone  
audio output connectors.  
•
The MC-12 passes analog sources  
to all Zone 2 or Record Zone  
audio output connectors.  
Note the following:  
•
The MC-12 passes digital input  
signals directly to the Record Zone  
digital audio output connectors.  
The MC-12 sends digital input  
signals through D/A conversion  
before passing them to the Zone 2  
or Record Zone analog audio  
output connectors.  
•
The MC-12 passes analog input  
signals directly to the Zone 2 or  
Record Zone analog audio output  
connectors. The MC-12 sends  
analog input signals through A/D  
conversion before passing them  
to the Record Zone digital audio  
output connectors.  
•
Output signals from the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Front L/R are sent to Zone 2. Signals from other Main Zone audio  
output connectors are ignored.  
•
Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 and Record  
Zone audio output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening  
mode is activated, the Zone 2 and Record Zone audio output connectors  
will generate mono output signals.  
•
•
The MC-12 automatically sets the  
ZONE2 or RECORD IN parameter  
to DIGITAL when no analog audio  
input connector is assigned.  
•
•
The MC-12 automatically sets the  
ZONE2 or RECORD IN parameter  
to ANLG when no digital audio  
input connector is assigned.  
•
•
It is recommended to set the ZONE2 and RECORD IN parameters to  
DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in Dolby Digital  
or dts-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (i.e. Tivo® or Replay TV®).  
The INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL  
IN parameter can be used to assign  
a digital audio input connector  
for the selected input.  
The INPUT SETUP menu ANALOG  
IN parameter can be used to assign  
an analog audio input connector  
for the selected input.  
The MC-12 automatically uses LOGIC7 encoding to downmix multi-  
channel sources (except 5.1-channel analog sources) to LOGIC7-  
encoded stereo output signals for listening and recording. LOGIC7-  
encoded downmixes are compatible with matrix decoders, but will  
sound best when played back through a LOGIC7 listening mode.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
-18 to +12dB  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1 RECORD ADV  
ANLG IN LVL  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
+0dB  
OFF  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
ON  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
INPUT  
96kHz  
88.2kHz  
48kHz  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
44.1kHz  
5.1a  
5.1a FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
BLOCKED  
ENABLED  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
Parameter  
Possible Settings  
RECORD ADVANCED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
-18 to +12dB  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
RECORD ADVANCED  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu RECORD ADVANCED option  
opens the RECORD ADV menu shown above, which can be used to  
configure advanced Record Zone input settings.  
ON, OFF  
INPUT, 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz  
BLOCKED, ENABLED  
All RECORD ADV menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-8.  
The parameters on the left side of the RECORD ADV menus are  
identical regardless of which input is selected. The parameter  
settings on the right side are adjustable. The RECORD ADV menus  
shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings  
for each input.  
. . . Configuring Advanced Input Settings continues on page 3-20  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Configuring Advanced Input Settings (continued from page 3-19)  
DIG OUT RATE  
INPUT, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DIG OUT RATE  
ANLG IN LVL  
-18 to +12dB  
Controls the sample rate of digital and analog input signals sent to  
the Record Zone digital audio output connectors. When INPUT is  
selected, the MC-12 does not send input signals through sample  
rate conversion before passing them to the Record Zone digital  
audio output connectors, preserving the original sample rate of the  
input signal.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
RECORD ADVANCED  
ANLG IN LVL  
Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals  
sent to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors. The  
MC-12 applies these adjustments to input signals before passing  
them to the Record Zone digital audio output connectors. This  
parameter can be adjusted when an input source is present to  
prevent the internal A/D converter from overloading.  
When a value is selected, the MC-12 passes input signals through  
sample rate conversion before passing them to the Record Zone  
digital audio output connectors, converting the sample rate of the  
input signal to the selected value. It is recommended to set the DIG  
OUT RATE parameter to the appropriate value when using a  
recording format that operates on a single sample rate, such as  
CD-R format (44.1kHz).  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
Allows digital sources to bypass sample rate conversion for direct  
digital recording. When ON is selected, the MC-12 passes digital  
input signals directly to the Record Zone digital audio output  
connectors, preserving the original sample rate of the input signal.  
When OFF is selected, the MC-12 sends digital input signals  
through sample rate conversion before passing them to the Record  
Zone digital audio output connectors, allowing the sample rate of  
the output signal to match the sample rate of the recording device.  
RECORD  
BLOCKED, ENABLED  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD  
Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is  
selected, the MC-12 blocks the Record Zone audio output  
connectors to prevent feedback loops. However, the MC-12 still  
passes video input signals to the Record Zone video output  
connectors. When ENABLED is selected, the MC-12 passes audio  
and video input signals to the Record Zone audio and video output  
connectors.  
Note:  
DIG OUT RATE parameter settings have no effect  
when the DIGITAL BYPASS parameter is set to ON.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
SPEAKER SETUP  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
The MC-12 Balanced also includes 10 balanced  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front  
L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, and Rear  
L/R. Two additional audio output connectors labeled  
Aux L/R are provided for future expansion.  
Selecting the SETUP menu SPEAKERS option opens the SPEAKER  
SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to configure the  
Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup.  
The Main Zone includes 10 unbalanced audio output connectors  
labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, and Rear  
L/R. Two additional audio output connectors labeled Aux L/R are  
provided for future expansion.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
40Hz  
60Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
It is important to set crossover points before  
calibrating output levels. Otherwise, setting crossover  
points afterwards might invalidate calibrated output  
levels.  
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option  
opens the CROSSOVER SETUP menu shown above, which can be  
used to configure a custom or THX speaker setup.  
. . . Setting Crossover Points continues on page 3-22  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Setting Crossover Points (continued from page 3-21)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
40Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
MONO  
40Hz  
OFF  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MANUAL  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
40Hz  
60Hz  
C
L
ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
M
SUB  
ASA  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
•
Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest  
crossover point of the other speakers. For instance, if CUSTOM  
SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set the SUB  
XOVER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover point of the  
other speakers.  
Custom Speaker Setups  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option  
opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu shown above, which can be used  
to assign independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio  
output connector. Crossover points can be selected in 10Hz  
increments within a 30 to 120Hz range. With the exception of THX  
80Hz, all crossover points activate a 24dB-per-octave filter. The  
graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of  
each crossover point.  
In general, low frequencies will be redirected from the speakers  
with the highest crossover points to the speakers with the lowest  
crossover points. Low-frequency signals lower than the lowest  
crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest  
crossover point is FULL, low-frequency signals, excluding LFE  
information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.  
To configure a custom speaker setup:  
•
Select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating  
of the associated speakers. For instance, set to FRONT L/R  
parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency  
rating of the front speakers.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
Highpass Filter  
Lowpass Filter  
dB  
0
0
-12  
-24  
-36  
-48  
0
0
-60  
10  
20  
50  
100  
Hz  
200  
500  
1k  
Highpass filters attenuate low-frequency signals at 24dB per octave.  
The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of  
each crossover point. From left to right, the curves represent  
crossover points from 30 to 120Hz. This graph does not include the  
THX 80Hz crossover point, which attenuates low-frequency signals  
at 12dB per octave.  
Lowpass filters attenuate high-frequency signals at 24dB per octave.  
The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of  
each crossover point. From left to right, the curves represent crossover  
points from 30 to 120Hz.  
. . . Setting Crossover Points continues on page 3-24  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Setting Crossover Points (continued from page 3-23)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
THX SPEAKER SETUP  
THX SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
THX 80Hz  
SPEAKERS  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MANUAL  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX  
SPEAKER  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
THX 80Hz  
40Hz  
60Hz  
CONFIGURATION  
OFF  
OFF  
N/A  
C
L
ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
ASA  
M
SUB  
APART  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the MC-12 applies a THX  
80Hz crossover point with a 12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R,  
Center, Side L/R, and Rear L/R output connectors. The MC-12  
applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to  
the Subwoofer L/R output connectors.  
THX Speaker Setups  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu THX SETUP option opens  
the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen shown above, which indicates that  
pressing the ꢀ arrow button will automatically configure the Main  
Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. It is  
recommended to use THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker  
setup.  
Note:  
A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX  
listening modes.  
When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:  
•
Press the ꢀ arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio  
output connectors for a THX speaker setup. The THX SETUP  
menu shown above will open on the on-screen display.  
•
Press the ꢁ arrow button to close the message without  
configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX  
speaker setup.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
Speaker Setup Parameters  
OR  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters that can be  
used to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the  
desired speaker setup. These parameters are available on the  
CUSTOM and THX SETUP menus.  
Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of  
which speaker setup is selected. When a parameter setting is  
adjusted on one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is  
automatically adjusted on the other menu. For instance, when a  
THX speaker setup is selected, the speaker setup parameters on the  
CUSTOM SETUP menu are also set to THX 80Hz.  
CUSTOM SETUP Menu  
THX SETUP Menu  
Parameter  
FRONT L/R*  
Default Setting  
Possible Settings  
Default Setting  
Possible Settings  
THX 80Hz  
40Hz  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
CENTER*  
SIDE L/R*  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R*  
SUB XOVER*  
LFE*  
60Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
MONO  
40Hz  
ON  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
MONO, STEREO, NONE  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz  
ON, OFF  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
THX 80Hz  
ON  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz, NONE  
MONO  
THX 80Hz  
ON, OFF  
ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
BGC  
ASA  
N/A†  
APART  
ON, OFF  
N/A†  
ON, OFF  
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER  
APART  
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER  
* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.  
† When the ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).  
. . . Setting Crossover Points continues on page 3-26  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Setting Crossover Points (continued from page 3-25)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
40Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
MONO  
40Hz  
OFF  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MANUAL  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
40Hz  
60Hz  
C
L
ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
M
SUB  
ASA  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
SUB XOVER  
SUBWOOFERS L/R  
REAR L/R SPEAKERS  
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS  
CENTER SPEAKER  
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
MONO  
STEREO  
NONE  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120H  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120H  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120H  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
FRONT L/R  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors  
labeled Front L/R.  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the FRONT L/R parameter  
opens the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a crossover point for the Front L/R output connectors.  
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.  
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency  
rating of the front speakers.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
SIDE L/R  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Side L/R.  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the FRONT L/R parameter  
cannot be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically applies a THX 80Hz  
crossover point to the Front L/R output connectors.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SIDE L/R  
CENTER  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the SIDE L/R parameter  
opens the SIDE L/R SPEAKERS menu shown on the previous page,  
which can be used to select a crossover point for the Side L/R  
output connectors.  
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Center.  
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.  
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-  
frequency rating of the side speakers.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CENTER  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the CENTER parameter  
opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu shown on the previous page,  
which can be used to select a crossover point for the Center output  
connector.  
•
Select NONE if the speaker setup does not include side  
speakers. The MC-12 will redirect side channel signals to the  
Rear L/R output connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also  
set to NONE, the MC-12 will redirect surround channel signals  
to the Front L/R output connectors.  
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.  
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-  
frequency rating of the center speaker.  
•
Select NONE if the speaker setup does not include a center  
speaker. The MC-12 will redirect center channel signals to the  
Front L/R output connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening  
mode is activated. In this instance, configure the speaker setup  
with the associated DVD-A/SACD player to redirect center  
channel signals.  
Note:  
When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby  
Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX,  
and dts-ES decoding are not available. The ASA  
parameter is also not available.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the SIDE L/R parameter  
cannot be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically applies a THX 80Hz  
crossover point to the Side L/R output connectors.  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the CENTER parameter  
cannot be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically applies a THX 80Hz  
crossover point to the Center output connector.  
. . . Setting Crossover Points continues on page 3-28  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Setting Crossover Points (continued from page 3-27)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
THX SPEAKER SETUP  
THX SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
THX 80Hz  
SPEAKERS  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MANUAL  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX  
SPEAKER  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
THX 80Hz  
40Hz  
60Hz  
CONFIGURATION  
OFF  
OFF  
N/A  
C
L
ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
ASA  
M
SUB  
APART  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
THX REAR SPEAKERS  
THX 80Hz  
NONE  
REAR L/R  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
REAR L/R  
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Rear L/R.  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the REAR L/R parameter  
opens the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be  
used to activate and deactivate the Rear L/R output connectors.  
•
Select THX 80Hz to activate the Rear L/R output connectors,  
configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a  
7.1-channel THX speaker setup.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
REAR L/R  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the REAR L/R parameter  
opens the REAR L/R SPEAKERS menu shown on page 3-26, which  
can be used to select a crossover point for the Rear L/R output  
connectors.  
•
Select NONE to deactivate the Rear L/R output connectors,  
configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a  
5.1-channel THX speaker setup.  
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.  
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-  
frequency rating of the rear speakers.  
Note:  
•
Select NONE if the speaker setup does not include rear  
speakers. The MC-12 will redirect rear channel signals to the  
Side L/R output connectors. If the SIDE L/R parameter is also set  
to NONE, the MC-12 will redirect surround channel signals to  
the Front L/R output connectors.  
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby  
Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX,  
and dts-ES decoding are not available. The ASA  
parameter is also not available.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
SUB L/R  
MONO, STEREO, NONE  
SUB XOVER  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SUB L/R  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SUB XOVER  
Configures the Main Zone audio output connector labeled  
Subwoofer L/R for a speaker setup that includes one, two, or no  
subwoofer(s).  
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R.  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the SUB XOVER  
parameter opens the SUB XOVER menu shown on page 3-26,  
which can be used to select a crossover point for the Subwoofer L/R  
output connectors. Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the  
subwoofer. Otherwise, select the crossover point equal to the  
lowest crossover point of the other speakers.  
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the SUB L/R parameter  
opens the SUBWOOFERS L/R menu shown on page 3-26, which  
can be used to select the desired configuration for the Subwoofer  
L/R output connectors.  
•
Select MONO if the speaker setup includes one subwoofer. The  
MC-12 sends low-frequency front, center, and surround  
channel signals to the Subwoofer L/R output connectors.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
•
Select STEREO if the speaker setup includes two subwoofers.  
The MC-12 sends low-frequency front left, center, and surround  
left channel signals to the Subwoofer L output connector and  
low-frequency front right, center, and surround right channel  
signals to the Subwoofer R output connector.  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the SUB XOVER parameter  
cannot be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically applies a THX 80Hz  
crossover point to the Subwoofer L/R output connectors.  
. . . Setting Crossover Points continues on page 3-30  
•
Select NONE if the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer.  
The MC-12 redirects low-frequency signals to the speakers  
with the lowest crossover points – unless the 5.1a BYPASS  
listening mode is activated. In this instance, configure the  
speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/SACD player to  
redirect low-frequency signals.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the SUB L/R parameter  
cannot be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically configures the  
Subwoofer L/R output connectors for a speaker setup that includes  
one subwoofer.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Setting Crossover Points (continued from page 3-29)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
40Hz  
60Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
ON  
OFF  
THX SPEAKER SETUP  
THX SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
40Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
MONO  
40Hz  
OFF  
APART  
CLOSE  
TOGETHER  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX  
SPEAKER  
THX 80Hz  
CONFIGURATION  
OFF  
ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
BGC  
ASA  
BGC  
ASA  
•
Select OFF to deactivate the LFE output connector, configuring  
the Main Zone audio output connectors for a 5.1-channel  
speaker setup. The MC-12 redirects LFE information to the  
Subwoofer L/R output connectors. If the SUB L/R parameter is  
set to OFF, the MC-12 redirects LFE information to the speakers  
with the lowest crossover point.  
LFE  
ON, OFF  
Activates and deactivates the Main Zone audio output connector  
labeled LFE.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LFE  
When a custom speaker setup is selected:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
•
Select ON to activate the LFE output connector, configuring  
the Main Zone audio output connectors for a 7.1-channel  
speaker setup. The MC-12 sends LFE information to the LFE  
output connector.  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, the LFE parameter cannot  
be adjusted. The MC-12 automatically deactivates the LFE output  
connector and redirects LFE information to the Subwoofer L/R  
output connectors.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
ULTRA2 SUB  
ON, OFF  
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)  
ON, OFF  
OR  
SETUP  
OR  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
@** ULTRA2 SUB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
ASA  
ASA  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
@** ULTRA2 SUB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
Select ON if the subwoofer using the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R is THX Ultra2-certified. When  
ON is selected, the BGC parameter can be used to adjust boundary  
gain compensation. Select OFF if the subwoofer using the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R is not THX  
Ultra2-certified. When OFF is selected, the BGC parameter is not  
available (N/A).  
A proprietary THX technology that processes rear channel signals  
to optimize the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening  
modes, including 5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
MUSIC,  
ULTRA2, MUSIC, 5.1a  
ULTRA2, or 5.1a  
MUSIC  
listening mode is activated. Applied to film sources, ASA processing  
blends surround channel signals to optimize ambient and  
directional surround sounds. Applied to music sources, ASA  
processing places surround channel signals on a wide, stable rear  
soundstage.  
BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)  
ON, OFF  
OR  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
BGC  
BGC  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
THX SETUP  
ASA processing is not available unless:  
•
One of the THX Ultra2 listening modes listed  
above is activated.  
Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the  
ULTRA2 SUB  
parameter is set to ON. When ON is selected, a highpass 55Hz filter  
is applied to all Main Zone audio output connectors and listening  
modes. When OFF is selected, no filter is applied to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors and listening modes.  
•
Both side and rear speakers are present.  
To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, configure a  
7.1-channel speaker setup in which the rear speakers are placed  
close together facing the center of the listening space.  
Note:  
The BGC parameter compensates for increased bass  
energy caused by the proximity of the speakers to the  
listening room walls.  
•
•
•
Select APART if the distance between the rear speakers is  
greater than 4 feet (1.2m).  
Select CLOSE if the distance between the rear speakers is  
greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but less than 4 feet (1.2m).  
Select TOGETHER if the distance between the rear speakers is  
less than 1 foot (0.3m).  
. . . ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) continues on page 3-32  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) (continued from page 3-31)  
When the 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7- and 5-channel playback, the MC-12 automatically:  
•
•
•
Activates ASA processing during 7-channel playback.  
Deactivates ASA processing during 5-channel playback.  
Switches between the 5.1  
ULTRA2 and 5.1  
,
ULTRA2 and  
, or 5.1a  
ULTRA2 and 5.1a  
listening modes.  
CALIBRATING SPEAKER DISTANCES & OUTPUT LEVELS  
The MC-12 offers both automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output levels. Calibration helps to ensure accurate output  
signal arrival time and level at the primary listening position. However, it is not a substitute for proper speaker placement.  
Before calibrating speaker distances and output levels:  
Speaker Calibration Parameters  
The table on the next page indicates the speaker calibration  
parameters that can be used to set speaker distances and output  
levels for the speakers connected to the corresponding Main Zone  
audio output connectors. These parameters are available on the  
speaker distance and output level menus shown throughout this  
section. All parameters perform the same function whether  
automatic or manual calibration is selected.  
•
Set crossover points for the Main Zone audio output connectors.  
Otherwise, setting crossover points afterwards might invalidate  
calibrated output levels. (The CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu  
can be used to set crossover points.)  
•
•
Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including  
conversations, air conditioners, and sounds that filter in  
through open doors and windows.  
Remove objects – including people – blocking the line-of-sight  
path between the microphones or SPL meter and the speakers.  
Speaker Distance Parameters  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
Determine the distance between the primary listening position and  
the speaker connected to the corresponding Main Zone audio  
output connector.  
Output Level Parameters  
-18.0dB to +12.0dB  
Determine the output level of signals sent to the speaker connected  
to the corresponding Main Zone audio output connector.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
UNITS  
FEET, METERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
UNITS  
Determines the unit of measurement in which speaker distances are calculated on ALL speaker distance menus. When FEET is  
selected, the MC-12 calculates speaker distances in feet. When METERS is selected, the MC-12 calculates speaker distances in meters. When  
the UNITS parameter setting is adjusted, the MC-12 automatically adjusts speaker distances to the closest available value in the selected unit  
of measurement.  
Speaker Distance Settings  
Output Level Settings  
Parameter  
FRONT LEFT  
Default Setting  
Possible Settings  
Default Setting  
Possible Settings  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
+0.0ft  
N/A†  
N/A†  
FEET  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A†  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
CENTER  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
FEET, METERS  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE LEFT  
REAR LEFT  
REAR RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
MONO SUB*  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
N/A†  
UNITS  
* When one subwoofer is included in the speaker setup, this parameter is labeled MONO SUB. When two subwoofers are included in the speaker setup, this parameter is labeled SUB LEFT.  
† When a speaker is not included in the speaker setup, the corresponding speaker distance or output level parameter is not available (N/A).  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION  
The MC-12 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output levels, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration  
options. A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.  
Automatic Options  
Details  
MICROPHONE CHECK  
• Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.  
• Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors, allowing the  
MC-12 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.  
• Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual  
microphone levels.  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
• Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.  
• Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances and  
output levels.  
• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening  
position and the speaker.  
• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/-0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output levels  
within +/-3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).  
DISTANCES  
LEVELS  
• Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.  
• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the desired  
values.  
• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening  
position and the speaker.  
• Activates automatic calibration of output levels.  
• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired values.  
• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/-0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output levels  
within +/-3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
Step A: Connecting the Microphones  
• The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit  
LFE  
CAUTION  
MAIN AUDIO OU  
require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically  
abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or  
irreparable damage to the microphone.  
MICROPHONE INPUTS  
3
1
2
3
4
• Never make or break microphone input connections unless  
the MC-12 is powered off with the rear panel power switch  
OR standby mode is activated with the front panel or remote  
control standby button.  
TRIGGER OUTPUTS  
MC-12 Rear Panel  
Note the following:  
A-1. Make sure the MC-12 is powered off with the rear panel  
power switch OR standby mode is activated with the front  
panel or remote control standby button.  
•
•
•
Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the  
Lexicon Microphone Kit available at authorized Lexicon dealers.  
Performing automatic calibration with other microphones will  
produce unknown results.  
A-2. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon  
Microphone Kit to the microphone input connectors on the  
MC-12 rear panel shown above. Make sure the microphone  
cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.  
Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the  
desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to  
the microphone placement instructions and illustrations  
included in this section.  
During the microphone check, the microphones will be  
referred to as 1, 2, 3, and 4 based on the input connector to  
which the microphone is connected. It is recommended to  
label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes.  
It is important to read and observe the care and handling  
documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to  
ensure optimal microphone performance.  
A-3. Power on the MC-12 with the rear panel power switch OR  
deactivate standby mode with the front panel or remote  
control standby button.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step B: Positioning the Microphones for the Microphone Check  
B-1.  
Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.  
RECOMMENDED  
microphone positioning for the microphone check  
During the microphone check, position the  
microphones:  
ꢀ
as close together as possible  
FL  
C
FR  
ꢀ
relatively centered between and equidistant from  
the front left and right speakers  
ꢀ
ꢀ
in a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers  
in a location unobstructed by furniture and other  
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration  
noise signals  
ꢀ
at least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls,  
but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers  
SL  
SR  
The illustration at the right provides an example of proper  
microphone placement during the microphone check. All of the  
microphones are positioned as close together as possible in an  
unobstructed location that is equidistant from the front left and  
right speakers.  
RL  
RR  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
RECOMMENDED  
microphone positioning for the microphone check  
During the microphone check, do not:  
✗
separate the microphones  
FL  
C
FR  
✗
scatter the microphones throughout the listening  
space  
✗
✗
obstruct the line-of-sight path between the  
microphones and the speakers  
position the microphones on the floor, on seat  
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture  
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure  
calibration noise signals  
✗
position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of  
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)  
from any one speaker  
SL  
SR  
The illustration at the right provides an example of improper  
microphone placement during the microphone check. The  
microphones are scattered throughout the listening space rather  
than positioned as close together as possible in a location that is  
equidistant from the front left and right speakers. In addition,  
two microphones are positioned on the floor and two  
microphones are positioned on a table obstructed by furniture.  
RL  
RR  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step C: Checking the Microphones  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
GROUP MICROPHONES  
INTO A BUNDLE IN THE  
MIDDLE OF THE ROOM  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
PRESS V TO BEGIN  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
MIC CHECK  
Note the following:  
C-2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen will open on the  
on-screen display, indicating the importance of proper  
microphone placement to achieve accurate automatic  
calibration results.  
•
The MC-12 outputs calibration noise signals between 55 and  
95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments  
until the microphones detect the required level. If the  
calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the ꢁ arrow  
button to cancel the microphone check.  
C-2. Press the ꢀ arrow button to begin the microphone check.  
The following screens will appear on the on-screen display as  
the microphone check is performed:  
•
Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed  
volume level, it is recommended to set all volume controls for  
associated components (i.e. speakers, subwoofers, and power  
amplifiers) to a reasonable level before performing automatic  
calibration. When the procedure is finished, the MC-12  
automatically reverts to the last volume level that was selected  
before automatic calibration began.  
CHECKING FOR SILENCE  
Appears on the on-screen display  
while the MC-12 determines relative  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
CHECKING FOR SILENCE  
noise level of the listening space  
and the internal noise level of  
PLEASE WAIT  
•
During automatic calibration, it is recommended to refer to the  
on-screen display rather than the front panel display, as addi-  
tional information and instructions are available on the on-  
screen display.  
the microphones. After eliminating  
microphones that are not detected or not functioning, the  
MC-12 calculates an average level for all microphones.  
CHECKING MICROPHONES  
C-1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES  
option as shown in the menu illustration above.  
Appears on the on-screen display  
while the MC-12 confirms the  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
CHECKING MICROPHONES  
microphone level calculated during  
the silence check. To do this, the  
PLEASE WAIT  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
MC-12 sends alternating calibration noise signals to the front  
C-3. Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
microphone parameter. The MC-12 refers to the microphones  
according to the input connector to which the microphone  
is connected.  
left and right speakers. These signals are output between 55  
and 95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB  
increments until the microphones detect the required level.  
If the signal becomes too loud, press the ꢁ arrow button to  
cancel the microphone check.  
C-4. Press the ꢀ arrow button to view more detailed results for  
the selected microphone. A message similar to the one  
shown at the bottom of the previous column will open on  
the on-screen display. Refer to the table on the next page for  
information about all possible microphone check messages.  
The MC-12 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate  
microphones that register the signal at a level that is too low  
or too high. Then, the MC-12 determines the appropriate  
output level for the calibration noise signal used during  
automatic calibration.  
Note the following:  
•
•
The MC-12 retains the calculated microphone level until the  
SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed,  
another microphone check is required before automatic  
calibration can be performed.  
CHECK MICROPHONES Results  
Appears on the on-screen display when the MC-12 is finished  
checking the microphones. This screen indicates the  
individual check results for each microphone.  
For best results, it is recommended to perform automatic  
calibration with four microphones that have passed the  
microphone check. However, the MC-12 will perform automatic  
calibration as long as at least one microphone passes the  
microphone check. In this circumstance, place the successfully  
checked microphones in the primary listening position.  
•
An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the  
microphone check.  
•
An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not  
pass the microphone check.  
(MICROPHONE)  
OK  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
•
If a successful microphone check has been performed, do not  
disconnect the microphones from the microphone input  
connectors. If the microphones are disconnected, it is  
recommended to perform the microphone check again before  
proceeding to automatic calibration.  
MIC 1  
MIC 2  
MIC 3  
MIC 4  
OK  
OK  
ERROR  
0K  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
. . . Step C: Checking the Microphones continues on page 3-40  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step C: Checking the Microphones (continued from page 3-39)  
Message  
Description  
Troubleshooting  
The microphone detected the calibration • N/A  
noise signal without error.  
(MICROPHONE)  
OK  
The MC-12 did not detect the microphone • Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the  
(MICROPHONE)  
during the silence check.  
MC-12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.  
NOT DETECTED  
• The microphone might be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.  
The MC-12 detected the microphone • Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the  
(MICROPHONE)  
SIGNAL TOO LOW  
during the silence check. However, the  
microphone level determined during the  
silence check was not confirmed during  
the microphone check.  
MC-12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.  
• The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone  
placement examples that begin on page 3-36 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately  
positioned for the microphone check.  
• The microphone might be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.  
The microphone level is more than 20dB • Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the  
(MICROPHONE)  
OUT OF RANGE  
below the highest microphone level.  
MC-12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.  
• The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone  
placement examples that begin on page 3-36 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately  
positioned for the microphone check.  
• The microphone might be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.  
The microphone level could not be • Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners, and sounds  
(MICROPHONE)  
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE  
determined because of excessive room  
noise in the listening space.  
that filter in through open doors and windows.  
• The microphone might be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.  
Step D: Repositioning the Microphones for Automatic Calibration  
Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines whether  
the MC-12 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a single row, or  
several listening positions in the listening space. Refer to the diagrams on pages 3-41 to 3-45 for more information.  
D-1. Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the next page to position the microphones for automatic calibration. Select  
the microphone placement that best meets the needs of the listening space.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
RECOMMENDED  
to achieve the best results for a single listening position  
When calibrating for a single listening  
position, place the microphones:  
ꢀ
as close together as possible in a single listening  
position (the primary listening position)  
FL  
C
FR  
ꢀ
at the approximate spot where the listener’s head  
will be during listening  
ꢀ
ꢀ
in a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers  
in a location unobstructed by furniture and other  
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration  
noise signals  
SL  
SR  
ꢀ
at least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls,  
but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers  
The illustration at the right provides an example of proper  
microphone placement when calibrating for a single listening  
position. The microphones are positioned as close together as  
possible in a single listening position, allowing the MC-12 to  
calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that  
position.  
RL  
RR  
. . . Step D: Repositioning the Microphones for Automatic Calibration continues on page 3-42  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step D: Repositioning the Microphones for Automatic Calibration (continued from page 3-41)  
RECOMMENDED  
to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row  
When calibrating for a multiple listening  
positions in a single row, place the  
microphones:  
FL  
C
FR  
ꢀ
at the approximate spot where the listener’s head  
will be during listening  
ꢀ
ꢀ
in a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers  
in a location unobstructed by furniture and other  
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration  
noise signals  
ꢀ
at least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls,  
but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers  
SL  
SR  
The illustration at the right provides an example of proper  
microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening  
positions in a single row. Each microphone is positioned in a  
single listening position within a single row, allowing the MC-12  
to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that  
row at the expense of a single listening position.  
RL  
RR  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
RECOMMENDED  
to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows  
When calibrating for a multiple listening  
positions in multiple rows, place the  
microphones:  
FL  
C
FR  
ꢀ
at the approximate spot where the listener’s head  
will be during listening  
ꢀ
ꢀ
in a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers  
in a location unobstructed by furniture and other  
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration  
noise signals  
ꢀ
at least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls,  
but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers  
SL  
SR  
The illustration at the right provides an example of proper  
microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening  
positions in multiple rows. Each microphone is positioned in a  
single listening position within the rows, allowing the MC-12 to  
calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for a larger  
listening area at the expense of a single listening position.  
RL  
RR  
. . . Step D: Repositioning the Microphones for Automatic Calibration continues on page 3-44  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step D: Repositioning the Microphones for Automatic Calibration (continued from page 3-43)  
RECOMMENDED  
microphone positioning for automatic calibration  
During automatic calibration, do not:  
✗
✗
✗
✗
arrange the microphones along the perimeter of  
the listening positions or space  
FL  
C
FR  
position the microphones in spots where the  
listeners’ heads will not be during listening  
obstruct the line-of-sight path between the  
microphones and the speakers  
position the microphones on the floor, on seat  
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture  
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure  
calibration noise signals  
SL  
SR  
✗
position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of  
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)  
from any one speaker  
The illustration at the right provides an example of improper  
microphone placement during the microphone check. The  
microphones are positioned on the floor along the perimeter of  
the listening space, making it difficult for the MC-12 to calibrate  
optimal speaker distances and output levels for the actual  
listening positions.  
RL  
RR  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
RECOMMENDED  
microphone positioning for automatic calibration  
During automatic calibration, do not:  
✗
✗
✗
✗
arrange the microphones along the perimeter of  
the listening positions or space  
FL  
C
FR  
position the microphones in spots where the  
listeners’ heads will not be during listening  
obstruct the line-of-sight path between the  
microphones and the speakers  
position the microphones on the floor, on seat  
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture  
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure  
calibration noise signals  
SL  
SR  
✗
position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of  
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)  
from any one speaker  
The illustration at the right provides an example of improper  
microphone placement during the microphone check. The  
microphones are positioned on seat cushions rather than in spots  
where the listener’s heads will be during listening.  
RL  
RR  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step E: Performing Automatic Calibration  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
DISTANCES  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
TEST WILL BEGIN IN  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
10  
10  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
MANUAL  
YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC  
TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR  
SIT QUIETLY  
PRESS V TO SKIP  
COUNTDOWN  
PLACE MICROPHONES  
IN PRIMARY LISTENING  
POSITIONS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
LOCK OPTIONS  
PRESS V TO BEGIN  
COUNTDOWN  
Follow the instructions in the appropriate table column below to perform the desired automatic calibration procedure.  
STEP  
E-1  
DISTANCES  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
LEVELS  
Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option as shown in the menu illustration above.  
•
If a successful microphone check has been performed, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu shown above will open on the on-screen  
display. Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to highlight the desired automatic calibration option. Then, press the ꢀ arrow button  
MIC CHECK REQUIRED  
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION  
to select this option. Refer to the table on page 3-34 for more information about automatic calibration options.  
NO MICROPHONES  
DETECTED  
•
If a successful microphone check has not been performed, one of the error messages shown at the right will open on the on-screen  
display, indicating that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed. If this occurs,  
begin with Step A: Connecting the Microphones on page 3-35 to perform the microphone check.  
The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens will open on the on-screen display before automatic calibration is performed:  
E-2  
•
The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS screen shown above will open on the on-screen display, indicating that the MC-12 generates loud calibration noise  
signals during automatic calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the ꢁ arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the ꢀ arrow button  
to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screen.  
•
The countdown screen shown above will open on the on-screen display, activating a 10-second countdown to automatic calibration. Press the ꢀ button  
to skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. Otherwise, it is possible to leave the listening space without affecting automatic calibration results.  
The MC-12 will automatically activate automatic calibration when the countdown ends. It is recommended to return to the listening space about 10  
minutes later to avoid interrupting the automatic calibration procedure.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
SETTING DISTANCES  
SETTING DISTANCES  
SETTING LEVELS  
SETTING LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
12.0ft  
10.5ft  
12.0ft  
4.5ft  
ERROR  
6.0ft  
4.5ft  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
-2.0dB  
ERROR  
-2.0dB  
-4.5dB  
-3.0dB  
-3.0dB  
-4.5dB  
N/A  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
STEP  
E-3  
DISTANCES  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
LEVELS  
The SETTING DISTANCES screen shown above will open on the on-screen display while the MC-12  
calibrates speaker distances.  
This step does not occur when the AUTO  
SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is selected.  
•
During speaker distance calibration, the MC-12 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES screen. The cursor  
automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each  
parameter while the MC-12 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. When finished, the  
MC-12 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.  
•
Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker  
distance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers and LFE subwoofers. For this  
reason the MC-12 does not send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer L/R and LFE output  
connectors during speaker distance calibration. Instead, the MC-12 automatically calibrates  
subwoofer and LFE subwoofer distances to the shortest distance of the other speakers. These  
distances can be manually adjusted on the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu (page 3-52).  
This step does not occur when the AUTO  
SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option is  
selected.  
The SETTING LEVELS screen shown above will open on the on-screen display while the MC-12  
calibrates output levels.  
E-4  
•
The MC-12 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order  
shown on the SETTING LEVELS screen. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker  
calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter while the MC-12 calculates an output level for  
the corresponding speaker. When finished, the MC-12 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR  
message to the right of the parameter label.  
. . . Step E: Performing Automatic Calibration continues on page 3-48  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step E: Performing Automatic Calibration (continued from page 3-47)  
STEP  
E-5  
DISTANCES  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
FRONT LEFT  
OK  
AUTO DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
OK  
12.0ft  
10.5ft  
12.0ft  
4.5ft  
ERROR  
6.0ft  
4.5ft  
N/A  
-2.0dB  
DISTANCES  
LEVELS  
OK  
ERROR  
ERROR  
-2.0dB  
-4.5dB  
-3.0dB  
-3.0dB  
-4.5dB  
N/A  
Refer to the table on page  
3-50 for information about  
all possible speaker calibration  
messages.  
Refer to the table on page  
3-50 for information about  
all possible speaker calibration  
messages.  
AUTO VALUES APPLIED  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
When the MC-12 is finished calibrating  
speaker distances and output levels, the  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown  
above will open on the on-screen display,  
indicating the results for each calibration  
procedure.  
When the MC-12 is finished calibrating  
speaker distances, the AUTO DISTANCES  
screen shown above will open on the  
on-screen display, indicating the results for  
each individual speaker.  
When the MC-12 is finished calibrating output  
levels, the AUTO LEVELS screen shown above  
will open on the on-screen display, indicating  
the results for each individual speaker.  
•
An OK message indicates that no errors  
occurred during the calibration procedure.  
•
A value indicates that no errors occurred  
during the calibration procedure.  
•
An ERROR message indicates that  
–
•
A value indicates that no errors occurred  
during the calibration procedure.  
although a value was calculated – at least  
one error occurred during the calibration  
procedure.  
•
An ERROR message indicates that – although  
a value was calculated – at least one error  
occurred during the calibration procedure.  
•
An ERROR message indicates that – although  
a value was calculated – at least one error  
occurred during the calibration procedure.  
•
Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to  
highlight the desired calibration procedure.  
Then, press the ꢀ arrow button to select  
this procedure.  
•
•
Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to  
highlight the desired speaker calibration  
parameter. Then, press the ꢀ arrow button  
to view more detailed results for the selected  
speaker. A message similar to the one  
shown above will open on the on-screen  
display.  
•
•
Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to  
highlight the desired speaker calibration  
parameter. Then, press the ꢀ arrow button  
to view more detailed results for the selected  
speaker. A message similar to the one  
shown above will open on the on-screen  
display.  
•
•
•
Selecting DISTANCES opens the AUTO  
DISTANCES screen shown in the DISTANCES  
column (left).  
Selecting the LEVELS option opens the  
AUTO LEVELS screen shown in the LEVELS  
column (right).  
Refer to the table on page 3-50 for  
information about all possible speaker  
calibration messages.  
Refer to the table on page 3-50 for  
information about all possible speaker  
calibration messages.  
Refer to the instructions in the appropriate  
column to view more detailed results for  
each individual speaker.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
STEP  
E-6  
DISTANCES  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
LEVELS  
SET DISTANCES  
AUTO DISTANCES  
AUTO DISTANCES  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO DISTANCES*  
SET LEVELS  
AUTO LEVELS  
ORIGINAL LEVELS  
AUTO LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
12.0ft  
10.5ft  
12.0ft  
4.5ft  
ERROR  
6.0ft  
4.5ft  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
12.0ft  
10.5ft  
12.0ft  
4.5ft  
ERROR  
6.0ft  
4.5ft  
N/A  
-2.0dB  
ERROR  
-2.0dB  
-4.5dB  
-3.0dB  
-3.0dB  
-4.5dB  
N/A  
DISTANCES  
LEVELS  
OK  
ERROR  
ORIGINAL DISTANCES  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
AUTO VALUES APPLIED  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
R
SR  
0.0ft  
RR  
0.0ft  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
0.0dB  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0dB  
C
L
C
0.0dB  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
M
SUB  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
0.0ft 0.0ft  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
Press the ꢁ arrow button to return to the  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown  
above.  
Press the ꢁ arrow button to open the SET  
DISTANCES screen shown above, which can  
be used to select the desired speaker  
distances.  
Press the ꢁ arrow button to open the SET  
LEVELS screen shown above, which can be  
used to select the desired speaker output  
levels.  
•
If desired, follow the instructions in step E-5  
to select the other calibration procedure.  
Otherwise, press the the ꢁ arrow button to  
return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
•
Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to toggle  
between calibrated speaker distances  
(AUTO) and original speaker distances. The  
speaker graphics at the bottom of the  
on-screen display will update to indicate  
the selected values.  
•
Press the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons to toggle  
between calibrated output levels (AUTO)  
and original output levels. The speaker  
graphics at the bottom of the on-screen  
display will update to indicate the selected  
values.  
*
The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown above  
as an example. The AUTO LEVELS screen can  
be substituted.  
•
•
Press the ꢀ arrow button to apply the  
selected values. A confirmation message  
will appear on the on-screen display,  
indicating that the selected values have  
been applied.  
•
•
Press the ꢀ arrow button to apply the  
selected values. A confirmation message  
will appear on the on-screen display,  
indicating that the selected values have  
been applied.  
When the desired values have been applied,  
press the ꢁ arrow button twice in succession  
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
When the desired values have been applied,  
press the ꢁ arrow button twice in succession  
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
If desired, refer to the MANUAL CALIBRATION section that begins on page 3-51 to fine-tune individual speaker distances and output levels. It is recommended to  
configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings (page 3-56).  
Note:  
. . . Step E: Performing Automatic Calibration continues on page 3-50  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Step E: Performing Automatic Calibration (continued from page 3-49)  
Message  
Description  
Troubleshooting  
The MC-12 calibrated the value for • N/A  
the selected speaker without error.  
(SPEAKER)  
OK  
The selected speaker is not present in • Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected speaker in the speaker  
the speaker setup. setup. (The MC-12 does not calibrate values for speakers that are not present in the speaker setup.)  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED  
The microphones detected out-of- • Examine the connections between the speaker and the associated amplifier to ensure that speaker wires are  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE  
phase calibration noise signals, but  
the calibrated value is still accurate.  
not crossed.  
• Dipolar speakers might cause this error. However, the MC-12 does not report this error unless at least half  
of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.  
The microphones detected calibration • The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a location  
(SPEAKER)  
noise signals at an unusually low level.  
where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on  
page 3-41 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.  
SIGNAL TOO LOW  
• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the  
MC-12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.  
The microphones did not detect • Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3-41 to confirm that the microphones  
(SPEAKER)  
UNABLE TO CALCULATE  
calibration noise signals or the MC-12  
could not calculate a value.  
are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.  
• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the  
MC-12 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.  
One or more of the microphones did • Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3-41 to confirm that the microphones  
(SPEAKER)  
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE  
not detect calibration noise signals at  
a reasonable level. The calibrated  
value might be inaccurate.  
are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.  
The microphones detected calibration • Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including, if applicable, built-in subwoofer amplifiers.  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH  
noise signals at an unusually high  
level.  
• The microphones might be positioned within 2 feet (0.61m) of the selected speaker. Refer to the microphone  
placement examples that begin on page 3-41 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned  
for automatic calibration.  
The microphones detected calibration • Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including, if applicable, built-in subwoofer amplifiers.  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW  
noise signals at an unusually low level.  
• The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker. Refer to the  
microphone placement examples that begin on page 3-41 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately  
positioned for automatic calibration.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
MANUAL CALIBRATION  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option opens the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to manually  
calibrate speaker distances and output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
0.0dB  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
0.0dB  
C
0.0dB  
M
SUB  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
Manual Options  
Details  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.  
• Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector, allowing  
for simultaneous output level adjustment.  
• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.  
• Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.  
• Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
• Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Subwoofer L/R and LFE as well as low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.  
• Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Performing Manual Speaker Distance Calibration  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option opens the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown below, which can be  
used to manually calibrate speaker distances.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
MANUAL  
R
SR  
0.0ft  
RR  
0.0ft  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
C
L
M
SUB  
N/A  
FEET  
METERS  
FEET  
SL RL  
0.0ft 0.0ft  
UNITS  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
To manually calibrate speaker distances:  
4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the ꢀ  
and ꢁ arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest  
available value.  
1. Follow the menu path shown above to select the MANUAL  
SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option. The  
SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above will open on the  
on-screen display.  
2. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
speaker distance parameter. Then, press the ꢂ arrow button to  
select the highlighted speaker distance parameter.  
3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the  
distance between the primary listening position and the front  
baffle of the speaker. For instance, if the FRONT LEFT parameter  
is selected, measure the distance between the primary listening  
position and the front baffle of the speaker connected to the  
Main Zone audio output connector labeled Front L.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
Performing Manual Output Level Calibration  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option opens the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, which can be  
used to manually calibrate output levels.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
0.0dB  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
0.0dB  
INTERNAL NOISE  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST  
C
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
M
SUB  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
N/A  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
Note the following:  
•
Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker  
setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These  
output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test,  
but there is no need to do so.  
•
It is recommended to use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter  
to manually calibrate output levels. An SPL meter is a device  
that measures the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure  
accurate output level calibration. SPL meters are available at  
Radio Shack (catalog no. 33-2050).  
. . . Performing Manual Output Level Calibration continues on page 3-54  
•
Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening  
position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location of  
the listener’s head during listening.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise  
test:  
Performing Manual Output Level Calibration  
(continued from page 3-53)  
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
2. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
output level parameter. Then, quickly press the ꢂ arrow button  
to select this output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph  
shown on the previous page will open on the on-screen display  
and automatic scrolling will stop.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,  
which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud  
calibration noise signals.  
Note:  
When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:  
During the internal noise test, it is possible to select  
an output level parameter just as the cursor is about  
to automatically scroll to the next parameter, causing  
the MC-12 to send the calibration noise signal to  
both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired  
speaker.  
•
•
Press the ꢂ arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST  
menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL  
ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically  
begins.  
Press the ꢃ arrow button to close the message without activating  
the internal noise test.  
3. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the ꢀ and ꢁ  
arrow buttons to select the output level that achieves a 75dB  
SPL meter reading from the primary listening position.  
During the internal noise test, the MC-12 sends calibration noise  
signals to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL  
ADJUST menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output  
level parameters, highlighting each parameter as the MC-12 sends  
the calibration noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The  
calibration noise signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.  
4. When the desired output level has been selected, press the ꢃ  
arrow button to close the parameter. The internal noise test will  
continue and automatic scrolling will resume.  
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all desired output levels have been  
set.  
Note:  
When the internal noise test begins, the MC-12  
automatically sets volume level to +0dB. Avoid  
adjusting the master volume level while the test is in  
progress to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
When the external noise test begins, the MC-12  
automatically sets volume level to +0dB. Avoid  
adjusting the master volume level while the test is in  
progress to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).  
Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page  
3-53, which can be used to manually calibrate output levels.  
To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise  
test:  
The external noise test requires an external calibration source such  
as an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is  
conducted, the MC-12 activates a listening mode based on the  
current Main Zone input source. Refer to the table below for more  
information about external noise test listening mode activation.  
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.  
2. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
output level parameter. Then, press the ꢂ arrow button to  
select this output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph  
shown on page 3-53 will open on the on-screen display.  
When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test,  
all custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored.  
The listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input  
source in its factory-default condition. When the external noise test  
is finished, the listening mode returns to its custom condition.  
3. When the horizontal bar graph opens, activate playback of the  
external calibration source and press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow  
buttons to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL  
meter reading from the primary listening position.  
4. When the desired output level has been selected, press the ꢃ  
Input Source  
Listening Mode  
PLII MOVIE  
DIGITAL*  
arrow button to close the horizontal bar graph.  
2-Channel  
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all desired output levels have been  
set.  
Dolby Digital  
dts(-ES)  
*
5.1-Channel Analog  
5.1a STANDARD  
* These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source,  
speaker setup, and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode  
Descriptions section that begins on page 5-5 for more information.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu BASS PEAK LIMITERS option opens the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu shown below, which can be used  
to set amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R and LFE as well as  
low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors. The MC-12 is equipped with an internal limiter that prevents  
low-frequency signals from exceeding a designated output level, which is essential for Dolby Digital and dts(-ES) sources that produce low-  
frequency signals peaks at much higher output levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers  
might not be able to reproduce these signals without overloading.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
CAL NOISE  
L/R LIMITER  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
LFE LIMITER  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
ON  
ON  
100dB  
ON  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
MANUAL  
100dB  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
0.0dB  
SET CROSSOVERS  
0.0dB  
LOCK OPTIONS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
C
0.0dB  
M
SUB  
75 to 120dB  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
ON  
OFF  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Note:  
It is recommended to configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
menu parameter settings whether output levels are  
automatically or manually calibrated.  
CAL NOISE  
ON  
ON, OFF  
ON, OFF  
L/R LIMITER  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
LFE LIMITER  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
ON  
100dB  
ON  
75 to 120dB  
ON, OFF  
100dB  
75 to 120dB  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
CAL NOISE  
ON, OFF  
LFE LIMITER  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
CAL NOISE  
LFE LIMITER  
Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or  
external calibration source. When ON is selected, the MC-12  
activates an internal calibration noise signal to set bass peak  
limiters. When OFF is selected, the MC-12 deactivates the internal  
calibration noise signal. Setting bass peak limiters requires an  
external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.  
Limits low-frequency signals sent to the LFE subwoofer or redirected  
to other speakers. When ON is selected, the MC-12 restricts the  
output level of these signals according to the LFE LIMIT ADJ  
parameter setting. When OFF is selected, the MC-12 does not  
restrict the output level of these signals, regardless of the LFE LIMIT  
ADJ parameter setting.  
L/R LIMITER  
ON, OFF  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
75 to 120dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
L/R LIMITER  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to  
other speakers. When ON is selected, the MC-12 restricts the  
output level of these signals according to the L/R LIMIT ADJ  
parameter setting. When OFF is selected, the MC-12 does not  
restrict the output level of these signals, regardless of the L/R LIMIT  
ADJ parameter setting.  
Specifies the output level restriction the MC-12 applies to the  
LFE output connector as well as to other Main Zone audio output  
connectors to which low-frequency signals are redirected. When  
the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter is selected, it is automatically set to  
75dB. The MC-12 applies the selected output level restriction when  
the LFE LIMITER parameter is set to ON.  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
75 to 120dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
MANUAL  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
Specifies the output level restriction the MC-12 applies to the  
Subwoofer L/R output connectors as well as to other Main Zone audio  
output connectors to which low-frequency signals are redirected.  
When the L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter is selected, it is automatically  
set to 75dB. The MC-12 applies the selected output level restriction  
when the L/R LIMITER parameter is set to ON.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Select the 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG option to configure the analog  
audio input connectors as five stereo and one 5.1-channel  
connectors.  
Selecting the SETUP menu REAR PANEL CONFIG option opens the  
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu shown below, which can be used to  
configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo  
connectors or as five stereo and one 5.1-channel connectors.  
When 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG is selected:  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
OR  
•
•
•
The analog audio input connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are  
configured as stereo connectors.  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
The analog audio input connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are  
configured as a 5.1-channel connector.  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
Input sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors  
labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector  
labeled 6, 7, and 8.  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
•
•
The 5.1-channel connector is sent to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors as indicated in the table below.  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
The 5.1-channel connector should only be used with 5.1-channel  
analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.  
Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio  
input connectors as eight stereo connectors.  
Input Connector(s)  
(L) & (R)  
Output Connector(s)  
Front L/R  
When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:  
•
All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo  
connectors.  
(C)  
Center  
•
•
The 5.1-channel connector is not available.  
(SUB)  
Subwoofer L/R & LFE  
Side L/R & Rear L/R  
Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector  
are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8.  
(LS) & (RS)  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
DISPLAY SETUP  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to customize the on-screen and  
front panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and create and activate a custom unit name.  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
DISPLAY SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
CUSTOM NAME  
ON, OFF  
Parameter  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
CUSTOM  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
Refer to page 3-61  
Activates the display of the custom unit name, which can be created  
with the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu. When ON is  
selected, the custom unit name scrolls across the on-screen and  
front panel displays whenever the MC-12 is activated. When OFF is  
selected, the custom unit name does not scroll across the on-screen  
and front panel displays when the MC-12 is activated.  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3-63  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
ON, OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
Refer to the next page  
. . . DISPLAY SETUP continues on page 3-60  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
Restores audio/video synchronization when the MC-12 is connected  
to components such as video processors that introduce video signal  
delays. Select a value between 1 and 60ms to activate an audio  
signal delay to compensate for the video signal delay.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
Display Setup (continued from page 3-59)  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
MC-12  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
^
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
OFF  
OFF  
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
LOCK OPTIONS  
•
Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to the previous  
character space. When the cursor is positioned in the first  
character space, pressing the ꢃ arrow button will close the  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu.  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown above,  
which can be used to create a custom unit name. The factory-  
default unit name is MC-12.  
4. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press  
the ꢃ arrow button until the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down  
menu closes.  
To create a custom unit name:  
When the CUSTOM NAME parameter is set to ON, the custom unit  
name scrolls across the on-screen and front panel displays  
whenever the MC-12 is activated.  
1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path shown above to  
open the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu.  
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens,  
locate the current unit name on the second line of the drop-  
down menu. The cursor automatically appears beneath the  
first character in the current unit name.  
3. When the current unit name is located, use the following  
remote control commands to enter the desired unit name:  
•
Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to change the character  
above the cursor.  
•
Press the ꢂ arrow button to advance to the next character  
space. The cursor will automatically wrap to the first  
character space when the last (twentieth) character space  
is passed.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
Selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu ON-SCREEN DISPLAY option opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu shown below, which can be used to  
customize the on-screen display.  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
STATUS  
2 SECONDS  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
TOP  
CENTER  
BOTTOM  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SECAM  
PAL  
NTSC  
ON  
OFF  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
all times. When 2 SECONDS is selected, the on-screen display  
activates for two seconds whenever a new input source is present  
or a new command is received. When ALWAYS OFF is selected, the  
on-screen display remains deactivated at all times, and will not  
reactivate until the STATUS parameter is reset to ALWAYS ON or 2  
SECONDS.  
Parameter  
STATUS  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,  
ALWAYS OFF  
POSITION  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM  
SECAM, PAL, NTSC  
ON, OFF  
FORMAT  
Note:  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display  
immediately deactivates. Press the OSD button or use  
the front panel display as a guide to reset the  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter to  
ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.  
ON  
ON, OFF  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
STATUS  
Controls the activation of the on-screen display when the display  
device is connected to a Main Zone video output connector. When  
ALWAYS ON is selected, the on-screen display remains activated at  
. . . On-Screen Display continues on page 3-62  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
On-Screen Display (continued from page 3-61)  
Note:  
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the  
on-screen display automatically deactivates when the  
display device is connected to the Main Zone  
component video output connector.  
POSITION  
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
POSITION  
Controls the vertical alignment of the two-line status on the display  
device screen. When TOP is selected, the two-line status appears  
near the top of the display device screen. When CENTER is selected,  
the two-line status appears centered on the display device screen.  
When BOTTOM is selected, the two-line status appears near the  
bottom of the display device screen.  
REMOTE STATE  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
REMOTE STATE  
Activates the remote control command bank indicator, a letter that  
appears in the top-right corner of the on-screen display to indicate  
the command bank from which the MC-12 last received a  
command. The table below indicates the letter that represents each  
command bank.  
FORMAT  
SECAM, PAL, NTSC  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FORMAT  
Controls the compatibility between the composite and S-video  
output connectors, the video switcher, and the display device.  
Select the setting that is compatible with the source components  
and the display device.  
When ON is selected, the command bank indicator appears in the  
top-right corner of the on-screen display whenever the MC-12  
receives a remote control command. When OFF is selected, the  
command bank indicator does not appear on the on-screen display  
when the MC-12 receives a remote control command.  
Note:  
The FORMAT parameter has no effect on the  
component video output connector.  
Letter Indicator  
Command Bank  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
None*  
Z
R
S
BACKGROUND  
ON, OFF  
Record Zone  
Shift  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
BACKGROUND  
Determines the on-screen display background. When ON is selected,  
the on-screen display appears over a solid blue or gray background  
(depending on the display device). When OFF is selected, the on-  
screen display appears over the video input signal.  
* No letter appears when the MC-12 receives a command from the Main Zone  
command bank, even if the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to ON.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu shown below, which can be used to customize the front panel display.  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON  
100%  
BRIGHTNESS  
OFF  
OFF  
100%  
75%  
50%  
25%  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
BRIGHTNESS  
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%  
Parameter  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,  
ALWAYS OFF  
Controls the illumination of front panel display characters. When a  
setting is selected, front panel display characters automatically  
adjust to the selected illumination percentage.  
BRIGHTNESS  
100%  
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
STATUS  
Controls the activation of the front panel display. When ALWAYS  
ON is selected, the front panel display remains activated at all  
times. When 2 SECONDS is selected, the front panel display  
activates for two seconds whenever a new input source is present  
or a new command is received. When ALWAYS OFF is selected, the  
front panel display remains deactivated at all times, and will not  
reactivate until the STATUS parameter is reset to ALWAYS ON or 2  
SECONDS.  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
MAIN PWR ON  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
MAIN PWR ON  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
Selects the volume level at which the Main Zone activates. When a  
value is selected, the MC-12 automatically sets Main Zone volume  
level to the selected value when the Main Zone is activated. When  
LAST LVL is selected, the MC-12 sets Main Zone volume level to the  
last volume level that was selected in the Main Zone during the  
previous operating session.  
Selecting the SETUP menu VOLUME CONTROLS option opens the  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu shown below, which can be used  
to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone volume levels.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL  
ZONE PWR ON  
REC PWR ON  
-30dB  
-30dB  
-30dB  
-30dB  
MUTE LEVEL  
-10dB, -20dB, -30dB, -40dB, FULL MUTE  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
MUTE LEVEL  
Determines the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main  
Zone when the Mute button is pressed. When a value is selected,  
Main Zone volume level is attenuated to the selected value when  
the Mute button is pressed. When FULL MUTE is selected, Main  
Zone volume level is fully attenuated when the Mute button is  
pressed.  
-10dB  
-20dB  
-30dB  
-40dB  
FULL MUTE  
Default  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Setting  
-30dB  
-30dB  
ZONE PWR ON  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
ZONE PWR ON  
-10dB, -20dB, -30dB, -40dB,  
FULL MUTE  
Selects the volume level at which Zone 2 activates. When a value is  
selected, the MC-12 automatically sets Zone 2 volume level to the  
selected value when Zone 2 is activated. When LAST LVL is selected,  
the MC-12 sets Zone 2 volume level to the last volume level that  
was selected in Zone 2 during the previous operating session.  
ZONE PWR ON  
REC PWR ON  
-30dB  
-30dB  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REMOTE ONLY  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
RECORD INPUTS  
FILM  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SETUP  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REC PWR ON  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
TRIGGER 1  
TRIGGER 2  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
REC PWR ON  
Selects the volume level at which the Record  
Zone activates. When a value is selected, the  
MC-12 automatically sets Record Zone  
volume level to the selected value when the Record Zone is  
activated. When LAST LVL is selected, the MC-12 sets Record Zone  
volume level to the last volume level that was selected in the  
Record Zone during the previous operating session.  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
R
TRIGGER SETUP  
FILM  
R
MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
SETUP  
TRIGGERS  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGERS option prompts the selection of the desired trigger output connector –  
1 or 2. The MC-12 includes three 12V DC trigger output connectors labeled PWR (power), 1, and 2. The power  
connector is not configurable. It is activated when the MC-12 is activated and deactivated when the MC-12 is  
deactivated. The other connectors can be configured for remote or program operation.  
Selecting TRIGGER 1 or TRIGGER 2 opens the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure  
the selected trigger output connector. The TRIGGER SETUP menu shown at the right is used as an example. The  
parameters on the left side of the TRIGGER SETUP menus are identical regardless of which connector is selected. The  
parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. The TRIGGER SETUP menu shown at the right indicates factory-  
default parameter settings for both connectors.  
5.1 MUSIC  
5.1  
5.1  
SurEX  
MUSIC  
DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
FILM  
MUSIC  
Parameter  
REMOTE ONLY  
Program Operation  
ON  
ON, OFF  
ON, OFF  
MUSIC  
OFF  
2-CHAN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY parameter – are considered program operation parameters.  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
MUSIC  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
. . . TRIGGER SETUP continues on page 3-66  
2CH BYPASS  
3-65  
ON  
OFF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
Lexicon  
When configured for program operation, the connector activates  
when the associated inputs or listening modes are activated and  
deactivates when the associated inputs or listening modes are  
deactivated.  
Trigger Setup (continued from page 3-65)  
REMOTE ONLY  
ON, OFF  
OR  
SETUP  
TRIGGERS  
TRIGGER 1  
TRIGGER 2  
REMOTE ONLY  
Note the following:  
Configures the selected trigger output connector for remote  
operation. Select the ON setting to configure the selected connector  
for remote operation. Select the OFF setting to configure the  
selected connector for program operation. Refer to the Program  
Operation Parameter description below for more information.  
•
Connectors can be associated with individual Main Zone inputs  
and listening modes, as well as the Zone 2 and Record Zone  
inputs.  
•
•
Connectors cannot be associated with individual Zone 2 and  
Record Zone inputs.  
When configured for remote operation, the connector labeled 1  
can be activated and deactivated with the MODE + and – buttons  
when the Zone 2 command bank is activated, and the connector  
labeled 2 can be activated and deactivated with the MODE + and –  
buttons when the Record Zone command bank is activated.  
Connectors can be associated with multiple inputs and listening  
modes at the same time.  
Note:  
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is  
selected to restore the factory-default version of the  
selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER  
SETUP menu program operation parameter is  
automatically set to OFF.  
Note:  
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to ON, all  
TRIGGER SETUP menu program operation parameter  
settings are ignored.  
Program Operation Parameters  
ON, OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
OR  
SETUP  
TRIGGERS  
TRIGGER 1  
TRIGGER 2  
Program Operation Parameter  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Configure the selected trigger output connector for program  
operation when the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF. Select  
the ON setting to associate the selected connector with the  
corresponding input(s) or listening mode.  
Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK  
OPTIONS menu shown on the next page, which can be used to  
protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP menu  
branch parameter settings from accidental changes.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP UNLOCKED  
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED  
MODES UNLOCKED  
SETUP  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP  
Protects SETUP menu branch settings from accidental changes.  
When LOCKED is selected, SETUP menu branch settings cannot be  
adjusted. When UNLOCKED is selected, SETUP menu branch  
settings can be adjusted.  
LOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Note the following:  
Parameter  
MODES  
•
•
•
When the MODES parameter is set to LOCKED, the up and  
down arrows can still be used to adjust subwoofer output  
levels applied to the selected listening mode when the Shift  
command bank is activated.  
UNLOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
AUDIO CNTRL  
SETUP  
When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED, the 2CH button  
can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG  
BYPASS parameter setting when the Shift command bank is  
activated.  
MODES  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MODES  
When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED, the 7/5 button  
can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT  
parameter setting when the Shift command bank is activated.  
Protects MODE ADJUST menu branch settings from accidental  
changes. When LOCKED is selected, MODE ADJUST menu branch  
settings – including all listening mode menu settings – cannot be  
adjusted. When UNLOCKED is selected, all MODE ADJUST menu  
branch settings can be adjusted.  
AUDIO CNTRL  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
AUDIO CNTRL  
Protects AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings from accidental  
changes. When LOCKED is selected, AUDIO CONTROLS menu  
branch settings cannot be adjusted. When UNLOCKED is selected,  
AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings can be adjusted.  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
AUDIO CONTROLS  
AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
Lexicon  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
Selecting the MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS option opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu shown below, which can be used to customize the  
Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone audio output connectors.  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
RECORD BALANCE  
<|>  
<|>  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
B<  
<|>  
>F  
ON  
OFF  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
•
The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE, and FADER  
parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors. This  
includes all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the  
5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
BASS  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
ON, OFF  
TREBLE  
•
•
The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter affects the Zone 2 audio  
output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs.  
TILT EQ  
The REC BALANCE parameter affects the Record Zone audio  
output connectors, including all Record Zone inputs.  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
<|>  
L< to <|> >R  
B< to <|> >F  
L< to <|> >R  
L< to <|> >R  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
REC BALANCE  
<|>  
<|>  
AUDIO CONTROLS menu parameter descriptions begin on the next page.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MC-12  
BASS  
-6.0 to +6.0  
BASS  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE,  
and Subwoofer L/R. The graph shown at the right indicates the  
frequency response of all BASS parameter settings.  
+6.0  
+5.5  
+5.0  
+4.5  
+4.0  
+3.5  
+3.0  
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
+0.0  
-0.5  
-1.0  
-1.5  
-2.0  
-2.5  
-3.0  
-3.5  
-4.0  
-4.5  
-5.0  
-5.5  
-6.0  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated:  
•
•
•
Pressing the CD button increases the BASS  
parameter setting in 0.5dB increments.  
+0.0  
Pressing the TAPE button decreases the BASS  
parameter setting in 0.5dB increments.  
Pressing the OSD button sets the BASS, TREBLE,  
and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to  
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and  
Subwoofer L/R.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
Lexicon  
TREBLE  
-6.0 to +6.0  
TREBLE  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
TREBLE  
Controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The graph  
shown at the right indicates the frequency response of all TREBLE  
parameter settings.  
+6.0  
+5.5  
+5.0  
+4.5  
+4.0  
+3.5  
+3.0  
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
+0.0  
-0.5  
-1.0  
-1.5  
-2.0  
-2.5  
-3.0  
-3.5  
-4.0  
-4.5  
-5.0  
-5.5  
-6.0  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated:  
•
•
•
Pressing the PVR button increases the TREBLE  
parameter setting in 0.5dB increments.  
+0.0  
Pressing the TUNER button decreases the TREBLE  
parameter setting in 0.5dB increments.  
Pressing the OSD button sets the BASS, TREBLE,  
and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MC-12  
TILT EQ  
-3.0 to +3.0  
TILT EQ  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
TILT EQ  
+3.0  
+2.8  
+2.6  
+2.4  
+2.2  
+2.0  
+1.8  
+1.6  
+1.4  
+1.2  
+1.0  
+0.8  
+0.6  
+0.4  
+0.2  
-0.0  
-0.2  
-0.4  
-0.6  
-0.8  
-1.0  
-1.2  
-1.4  
-1.6  
-1.8  
-2.0  
-2.2  
-2.4  
-2.6  
-2.8  
+3.0  
+2.8  
+2.6  
+2.4  
+2.2  
+2.0  
+1.8  
+1.6  
+1.4  
+1.2  
+1.0  
+0.8  
+0.6  
+0.4  
+0.2  
+0.0  
-0.2  
-0.4  
-0.6  
-0.8  
-1.0  
-1.2  
-1.4  
-1.6  
-1.8  
-2.0  
-2.2  
-2.4  
-2.6  
-2.8  
-3.0  
Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and  
Subwoofer L/R. This parameter setting affects the entire frequency  
spectrum with a hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases,  
frequencies higher than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower  
than 1kHz are simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases,  
frequencies higher than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than  
1kHz are simultaneously boosted. The graph shown at the right  
indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ parameter settings.  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated:  
•
•
•
Pressing the GAME button increases the TILT EQ  
parameter setting in 0.2dB increments.  
Pressing the AUX button decreases the TILT EQ  
parameter setting 0.2dB increments.  
Pressing the OSD button sets the BASS, TREBLE,  
and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.  
-3.0  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
Lexicon  
LOUDNESS  
ON, OFF  
LOUDNESS  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
LOUDNESS  
dB  
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically  
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front  
L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R. When ON is selected, loudness  
compensation is automatically applied based on volume level. As  
volume level increases, the amount of low-frequency boost  
automatically decreases. The loudness contour is optimized for  
input sources calibrated to THX reference levels. When OFF is  
selected, no loudness compensation is applied.  
0
0
+12  
0
0
+9  
The graph shown at the right indicates the frequency response that  
is automatically applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to  
ON and Main Zone volume level is adjusted.  
0
0
+6  
Note:  
0
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing  
the TV button sets the LOUDNESS parameter to ON  
and pressing the SAT button sets the LOUDNESS  
parameter to OFF.  
0
+3  
0
0
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k  
20k  
The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is auto-  
matically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R,  
Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MC-12  
BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BALANCE  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Front L/R.  
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output  
connectors.  
Note:  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated:  
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated:  
•
•
Pressing the MENU button centers the Main  
Zone BALANCE parameter.  
•
•
Pressing the MENU button centers the ZONE2  
BALANCE parameter.  
Pressing the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons adjusts the  
Main Zone BALANCE parameter left and right.  
Pressing the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons adjusts the  
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter left and right.  
FADER  
B< to <|> to >F  
RECORD BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
FADER  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
RECORD BALANCE  
Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Front L/R.  
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Record Zone audio output  
connectors.  
Note:  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated:  
When the Record Zone command bank is activated:  
•
•
Pressing the MENU button centers the Main  
Zone FADER parameter.  
•
•
Pressing the MENU button centers the RECORD  
BALANCE parameter.  
Pressing the ꢂ and ꢃ arrow buttons adjusts the  
Main Zone FADER parameter backward and  
forward.  
Pressing the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons adjusts the  
RECORD BALANCE parameter left and right.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Listening Mode Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode Buttons • Mode Family  
Selection Buttons  
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
FILM •  
TV • MUSIC • MUSIC SURR • PLII +  
•
PLII MOVIE •  
R
R
PLII MUSIC • PRO LOGIC •  
FILM &  
MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB •  
CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL • PANORAMA • 2-CH SURROUND •  
2-CHANNEL • MONO LOGIC • MONO SURROUND • MONO • 5.1 FILM • 5.1  
TV • 5.1  
MUSIC • 5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, & 5.1  
• 5.1  
MUSIC • DIGITAL EX & DIGITAL • 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC •  
5.1 MONO SURR • 5.1 MONO •  
Decoding •  
ULTRA2 &  
2-CHAN • 5.1a  
• 5.1a  
&
FILM •  
MUSIC •  
MUSIC • 5.1a  
&
&
MUSIC •  
•
•
&
FILM • 5.1a  
ULTRA2, 5.1a  
SurEX, & 5.1a  
MUSIC • 5.1a STANDARD •  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS • OUTPUT LEVELS • CUSTOM  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
FILM  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
Selecting the MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu shown  
at the left, which prompts the selection of the desired listening mode. Selecting a listening  
mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which can be used to customize the  
selected listening mode. These adjustments are applied the next time the listening mode is  
activated.  
PRO LOGIC  
R
FILM  
R
MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
All listening mode menus are shown in the Appendix beginning on page A-14. The  
parameters on the left side of the listening mode menus differ from listening mode to  
listening mode. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. The listening mode  
menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each listening  
mode.  
When the MODE ADJUST menu opens, the activated listening mode is highlighted.  
Selecting another listening mode does not activate that listening mode. Rather, listening  
modes must be activated with one of the methods described in the Listening Mode  
Activation section that begins below.  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
5.1 MUSIC  
5.1  
5.1  
*
MUSIC  
DIGITAL*  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
FILM*  
LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION  
The MC-12 allows listening mode activation in the Main Zone. Listening modes are available  
for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog sources. In some cases, the MC-12  
automatically activates a listening mode in response to certain commands. For this reason,  
it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode activation  
occurs.  
MUSIC*  
*
MUSIC  
*
2-CHAN*  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1a  
5.1a  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
*
MUSIC  
Listening mode activation occurs through:  
*
These listening mode names differ  
depending on the current input  
source, speaker setup, and parameter  
settings. Refer to the Listening Mode  
Descriptions section that begins on  
page 5-5 for more information.  
•
the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters (2-CH,  
, and 5.1a)  
D,  
2CH BYPASS  
•
•
the front panel or remote control Mode buttons  
MUSIC  
the remote control mode family selection buttons (  
,
,
,
,
, and  
)
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION  
PARAMETERS  
The MC-12 allows the selection of four preferred listening modes  
for each Main Zone input, including one listening mode each for  
2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and 5.1-channel analog sources.  
The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that  
can be used to select preferred listening modes.  
DVD1  
CD  
COAX-4  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
AUTO  
1
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
FILM  
FILM  
FILM  
FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1  
D
5.1  
5.1a  
5.1a  
5.1a  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
2-CH  
Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel  
sources  
•
•
If the DVD1 input is selected while a 2-channel source is  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the FILM  
listening mode. If a 5.1-channel analog source becomes  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the 5.1a FILM  
listening mode.  
D
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital  
sources  
Selects a preferred listening mode for dts(-ES)  
sources  
If the CD input is selected while a Dolby Digital source is  
present, the MC-12 will automatically activate the 5.1 MUSIC  
listening mode. If the DVD1 input is then selected while a  
dts(-ES) source is present, the MC-12 will automatically activate  
5.1a  
Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel  
analog sources  
the  
or  
FILM listening mode.  
When a preferred listening mode is selected, the MC-12  
automatically activates that listening mode whenever a new input  
is selected or an appropriate input source is present. For instance,  
the DVD1 and CD INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode  
selection parameters are set as shown at the top of the next  
column.  
Note:  
Refer to the Selecting Preferred Listening Modes  
section that begins on page 3-11 for more  
information.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
MODE BUTTONS  
MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS  
MUSIC  
The front panel and remote control Mode buttons can be used to  
audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input source.  
Pressing the Mode ꢀ or + button scrolls upward through listening  
modes available for the current Main Zone input source. Pressing  
the Mode ꢁ or – button scrolls downward through listening modes  
available for the current Main Zone input source. For instance, if a  
2-channel source is present in the Main Zone, the Mode buttons  
can be used to audition 2-channel listening modes.  
,
,
,
,
, and  
The remote control mode family selection buttons can be used to  
select a listening mode within the corresponding mode family.  
Pressing a mode family selection button activates the most  
appropriate listening mode for the current Main Zone input source.  
For instance, pressing the L7 button while a 2-channel source is  
present in the Main Zone activates the FILM listening mode.  
The table below indicates the listening modes associated with each  
mode family selection button.  
Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu.  
The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of  
the Main Zone two-line status. The selected listening mode is  
automatically activated when scrolling stops.  
Input Source  
2-Channel  
PLII +  
Dolby Digital  
5.1  
DIGITAL*  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
N/A†  
MUSIC  
dts(-ES)  
5.1-Channel Analog  
5.1a  
N/A†  
Button  
*
*
PLII MOVIE  
FILM  
N/A†  
FILM*  
N/A†  
5.1a FILM  
N/A†  
TV  
FILM  
*
N/A†  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC*  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1  
* These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker setup, and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section that begins on the  
next page for more information.  
† The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the on-screen and front panel displays when the selected listening mode family does not offer a listening mode for the  
current Main Zone input source.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS  
The MC-12 offers an assortment of listening modes for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog sources. Listening mode descriptions  
begin below and continue in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu. The table included with each description indicates the  
corresponding listening mode menu parameters, as well as their factory-default and possible parameter settings. All listening mode menus are  
shown in the Appendix beginning on page A-14. Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
FILM  
Parameter  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 FILM  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
+0.0Db  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-  
encoded film sources.  
•
Derives seven channels from 2-channel sources, as well as full-  
frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase  
the perceived width, length, and sense of envelopment of the  
listening space.  
REAR  
ON  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
7.0kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Recommended for 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded film  
sources.  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
TV  
MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 TV  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 MUSIC  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
Similar to the  
FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored  
Similar to the  
FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored  
for broadcast sources.  
for music sources.  
•
•
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-  
encoded broadcast sources.  
•
•
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-  
encoded music sources.  
Recommended for 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded  
broadcast sources.  
Recommended for 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded music  
sources.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Parameter  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
MUSIC  
NEUTRAL  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
+0.0dB  
FILM  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
ON, OFF  
REAR  
ON  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
7.0kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
7.0kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
MODE ADJUST  
@*PLII + @**  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode available in  
other Lexicon products.  
Uses Dolby Pro Logic II decoding to derive five channels from  
Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
•
•
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo music  
sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings  
that contain added reverb.  
•
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
Extracts ambient sounds from the input source, then sends  
these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard from all  
directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that  
simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.  
•
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
•
Recommended for classical music sources.  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Parameter  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
MSURR  
NEUTRAL  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
7.0kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
@*PLII MOVIE  
MODE ADJUST  
@*PLII MUSIC  
•
Similar to the  
PRO LOGIC listening mode, but uses full-  
•
Similar to the PLII MOVIE listening mode.  
Designed for playback of stereo music sources.  
frequency stereo surround channels to realistically increase the  
perceived width of the listening space.  
•
•
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Decodes five channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Provides impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro  
Logic decoding.  
PANORAMA  
CTR WIDTH  
DIMENSION  
SURROUND DLY  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
3
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
•
Appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.  
NEUTRAL  
10ms  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
0 to 15ms  
Parameter  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
Parameter  
PRO LOGIC  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
MODE ADJUST  
@*PRO LOGIC  
•
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Decodes four channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Uses a mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff  
above 7kHz.  
Note the following:  
R
•
The  
listening modes cannot be selected as the  
•
Available for comparison purposes, particularly with the  
R
preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources. However, when  
the INPUT SETUP menu 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the  
FILM, PLII MOVIE, and  
FILM listening modes.  
R
R
MC-12 will activate a  
listening mode if a  
listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source  
was present.  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
R
•
•
The MC-12 will not activate a  
listening mode unless  
R
a 44.1 or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. The  
listening modes are not compatible with 88.2 or 96kHz, Dolby  
Digital, or analog sources.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
R
R
R
The  
listening modes can be activated with the front  
FILM &  
MUSIC  
R
panel or remote control Mode buttons. In addition, the  
FILM listening mode can be activated with the remote control  
dts button when a 2-channel source is present.  
R
R
MODE ADJUST  
dts NEO:6 FILM  
dts NEO:6 MUSIC  
OR  
•
•
Designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo film or  
music sources.  
Derive six channels when both side and rear speakers are  
present (rear channels will be in parallel). Derives five channels  
when only side or rear speakers are present. The LFE channel,  
also referred to as the .1 channel, is generated through bass  
management in the MC-12.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
MODE ADJUST  
NIGHTCLUB  
MODE ADJUST  
CONCERT HALL  
•
Designed for playback of “dry” music sources that benefit from  
the addition of room reflections, especially music sources that  
lack ambience in the recording.  
•
•
•
Generates early reflections to simulate large listening spaces.  
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm from Lexicon professional  
products, which are relied upon by a majority of recording  
engineers to add ambience to recordings.  
•
Generates early reflections to simulate small, intimate listening  
spaces.  
•
•
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm from Lexicon professional  
products, which are relied upon by a majority of recording  
engineers to add ambience to recordings.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
12  
0 to 18  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
20m  
1.72s  
OFF  
4 to 20m  
11  
0 to 18  
LIVENESS  
30ms to 20.2s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
ON  
ON, OFF  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
5m  
4 to 20m  
2.4kHz  
-2dB  
LIVENESS  
196ms  
5ms  
30ms to 20.2s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
9.0kHz  
+3dB  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
MODE ADJUST  
CHURCH  
MODE ADJUST  
CATHEDRAL  
•
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,  
reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening  
spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size, such  
as churches and chambers.  
•
•
Similar to the CHURCH listening mode.  
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,  
reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces with  
long reverberation time relative to their size, such as cathedrals.  
•
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm from Lexicon professional  
products, which are relied upon by a majority of recording  
engineers to add ambience to recordings.  
•
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm from Lexicon professional  
products, which are relied upon by a majority of recording  
engineers to add ambience to recordings.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE*  
Parameter  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE*  
5
0 to 18  
12  
0 to 18  
ON  
ON, OFF  
ON  
ON, OFF  
20m  
1.56s  
1.87s  
24ms  
2.4kHz  
-3dB  
4 to 30m  
30m  
3.72s  
4.47s  
23ms  
3.1kHz  
-8dB  
4 to 30m  
MID RT*  
24ms to 24.3s  
5ms to 48.6s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
MID RT*  
24ms to 24.3s  
5ms to 48.6s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
BASS RT*  
BASS RT*  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
* BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the  
full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.  
* BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the  
full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
PANORAMA  
CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
PANORAMA  
MODE ADJUST  
PANORAMA  
CALIBRATION  
•
Designed for playback of stereo and matrix-encoded sources.  
•
Selecting the PANORAMA listening  
mode menu CALIBRATION option  
opens the PANORAMA CALIBRATION  
menu shown at the right, which can  
be used to calibrate the PANORAMA  
listening mode. This listening mode  
must be calibrated to take full  
advantage of its effects.  
PANORAMA CALIBRATION  
SOURCE  
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg  
LISTENER POS +0  
LEFT & RIGHT  
•
•
Uses proprietary Lexicon algorithms to move the stereo image  
outward from the front speakers, producing a wider stereo field  
with greater depth.  
NOTE:  
ENSURE THAT  
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS  
BEEN PERFORMED  
PROPERLY  
Depends on proper location of the primary listening position  
and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned  
close to either side of the display device, the effect is produced  
over a wider area than when the front speakers are positioned  
at a large angle from the display device.  
•
•
For best results, it is recommended to center the primary  
listening position between the front left and right speakers as  
shown in illustration 5-B at the top of the next page (center).  
Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated  
with various results.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
An external calibration source is required to calibrate the  
PANORAMA listening mode. It is recommended to select a  
familiar stereo source.  
EFFECT LVL  
+4dB  
STEREO  
+0  
-12 to +6dB  
BASS CONTENT  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
INPUT BALANCE  
CALIBRATION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO  
-25 to +25  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
3.1kHz  
15ms  
<|>  
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
L< to <|> to >R  
Parameter  
SOURCE  
LEFT & RIGHT  
30deg  
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT  
10 to 90deg  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
LISTENER POS  
Refer to next column  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
+0  
-127 to +127  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
Front Left  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Front Right  
60°  
Primary Listening Position  
L127 . . . . . . Center . . . . . . R127  
L127 . . . . . . Center . . . . . . R127  
5-A  
5-B  
5-C  
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:  
POS parameter to compensate for the difference. Each increment  
within the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about  
one-third of an inch. Refer to the illustrations above for more  
information.  
1. Remove all obstructions between the primary listening position  
and the speakers.  
2. Make sure the distances between the primary listening position  
and the speakers are properly measured. To do this, select one  
of the following options:  
4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.  
5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.  
•
Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option  
to have the MC-12 automatically calibrate speaker  
distances.  
6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,  
set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in  
the right ear.  
•
Measure the distance between the primary listening  
position and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the  
corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to  
the closest available value.  
7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter  
settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the  
PANORAMA listening mode has been properly calibrated, the  
sound should be perceived to come from all around the  
primary listening position. If this does not occur, begin again  
with step 1.  
3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening  
position is not centered between the front left and right  
speakers as shown in illustration 5-B (above), set the LISTENER  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
2-CH SURROUND  
MONO LOGIC  
MODE ADJUST  
2-CH SURROUND  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO LOGIC  
•
Designed for playback of stereo sources.  
Sends stereo sources to all channels.  
Recommended for background music.  
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
•
•
Uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically  
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically  
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of  
the listening space.  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Parameter  
EFFECT LVL  
-9dB  
ON  
-12 to +6dB  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON, OFF  
3.1kHz  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
2-CHANNEL  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
MODE ADJUST  
2-CHANNEL  
•
•
•
Designed for playback of stereo sources.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Sends stereo sources to the front and subwoofer channels.  
Recommended for audio purists and comparison purposes  
with other listening modes.  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing  
the remote control TVL button activates the MONO  
LOGIC listening mode for 2-channel sources.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
MONO SURROUND  
5.1 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO SURROUND  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 FILM  
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to all channels.  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
film sources.  
•
Derives seven channels from 5.1-channel sources. When both  
Parameter  
side and rear speakers are present, the 5.1  
FILM listening  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
mode also increases the perceived length and sense of  
envelopment of the listening space.  
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film sources.  
MONO  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
•
•
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to the center channel.  
Parameter  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
Parameter  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
5.1 TV  
5.1 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 TV  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
Similar to the 5.1 FILM listening mode, but specifically  
Similar to the 5.1  
FILM listening mode, but specifically  
•
•
•
tailored for broadcast sources.  
tailored for music sources.  
•
•
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
broadcast sources.  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
music sources.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital broadcast  
sources.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music sources.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Parameter  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
•
•
The 5.1  
Ultra2 and 5.1  
SurEX listening modes are not  
5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, & 5.1  
available unless both side and rear speakers are present.  
OR  
OR  
5.1 @**  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 @** ULTRA2  
5.1 @** SurEX  
The 5.1 listening mode is available when neither THX  
Ultra2 nor THX Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present  
in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the  
speaker setup. The table below indicates the conditions in which  
THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are engaged.  
Note:  
•
The 5.1  
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.  
ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX  
The MC-12 cannot automatically detect THX  
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source  
does not include information in the input signal that  
identifies THX Surround EX encoding.  
•
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX  
parameter is set to OFF or when the SURROUND EX parameter  
is set to AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
•
•
The 5.1  
SurEX listening mode is available when THX  
Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND  
EX parameter is set to ON or when the SURROUND EX  
parameter is set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
5.1-Channel  
THX Surround EX  
Dolby Digital (Flagged)  
5.1-Channel  
THX Surround EX  
Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)  
Input Source  
5.1-Channel  
Dolby Digital  
Parameter Setting  
SURROUND EX: AUTO  
5.1  
5.1  
5.1  
ULTRA2  
SurEX  
5.1  
5.1  
SurEX  
SurEX  
ULTRA2  
. . . 5.1  
5.1  
5.1  
ULTRA2  
SURROUND EX: ON  
SURROUND EX: OFF  
SurEX  
ULTRA2  
5.1  
5.1  
ULTRA2  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, & 5.1  
continues on page 5-18  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
When THX Surround EX decoding is engaged:  
5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, & 5.1  
(continued from page 5-17)  
•
Applies matrix decoding to derive three surround channels  
from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
OR  
OR  
5.1 @**  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 @** ULTRA2  
5.1 @** SurEX  
•
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film  
sources.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources  
without THX Surround EX encoding.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
•
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
When THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged:  
•
•
Applies adaptive de-correlation to increase the perceived width  
of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround  
channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in  
home theaters.  
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
5.1  
MUSIC  
DIGITAL EX & DIGITAL  
OR  
@*DIGITAL  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 @** MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
@*DIGITAL EX  
•
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music  
sources.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present  
in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting, and the  
speaker setup. The table at the bottom of the next page indicates  
the conditions in which Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is  
engaged.  
The 5.1  
MUSIC listening mode is not available unless both  
side and rear speakers are present.  
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
•
The  
DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby  
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when the EX  
DECODING parameter is set to ON or when the EX DECODING  
parameter is set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoding is detected.  
•
Recommended for home theaters in which the rear speakers  
are placed close together.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
•
•
•
The DIGITAL EX listening mode is not available unless both  
side and rear speakers are present.  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
The DIGITAL listening mode is available when Dolby Digital  
Surround EX decoding is not engaged.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged when the  
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or when the EX  
DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a non-flagged  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without  
Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Note:  
The 5.1  
MUSIC listening mode can only be  
. . . DIGITAL EX & DIGITAL continues on page 5-20  
activated with the front panel or remote control  
Mode buttons.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
When Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged:  
DIGITAL EX &  
DIGITAL (continued from page 5-19)  
OR  
•
Applies matrix decoding to derive a surround back channel  
from the other surround channels.  
MODE ADJUST  
@*DIGITAL EX  
@*DIGITAL  
Note:  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
The MC-12 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source does  
not include information in the input signal that  
identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.  
Parameter  
EX DECODING  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
The DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby  
Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoding. This listening mode can also be used with 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources with mixed results.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Decodes 5.1 discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
sources. The five main channels are full frequency. The .1  
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited  
frequency range of 120Hz.  
5.1-Channel  
5.1-Channel  
Input Source  
5.1-Channel  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Parameter Setting  
(Flagged)  
(Non-Flagged)  
EX DECODING: AUTO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
EX DECODING: ON  
EX DECODING: OFF  
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
•
•
•
Designed for converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals  
into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.  
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital mono sources.  
Uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically  
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically  
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of  
the listening space.  
Sends downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals to  
the front speakers and the subwoofer.  
Recommended for recording purposes.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Parameter  
EFFECT LVL  
-9dB  
ON  
-12 to +6dB  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
-25 to +5dB  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON, OFF  
-5 to +5dB  
3.1kHz  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-127 to +127  
-5 to +5dB  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
+0dB  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-20.0 to +0.0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
SUB L/R LVL  
Note:  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-33  
•
When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the  
MC-12 automatically activates the 5.1 MONO  
LOGIC listening mode.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
•
When the Shift command bank is activated,  
pressing the TVL button activates the 5.1 MONO  
LOGIC listening mode for 5.1-channel sources.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
5.1 MONO SURR  
DECODING  
and  
listening mode names differ depending on the  
DECODING parameter  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO SURR  
encoding present in the input source, the  
setting, and the speaker setup. The table at the top of the next  
page indicates the conditions in which dts-ES decoding is engaged.  
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to all channels.  
•
•
listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is not  
engaged.  
Parameter  
•
dts-ES decoding is not engaged when the  
DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
parameter is set to OFF or when the  
DECODING parameter  
is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
•
•
listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is  
engaged.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the  
DECODING  
5.1 MONO  
parameter is set to ON or when the DECODING parameter  
is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a 6.1-  
channel discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO  
•
•
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to the center channel.  
•
listening modes are not available unless both side and  
rear speakers are present.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Note:  
Parameter  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
The table at the top of the next page is not applicable  
to the  
MUSIC listening modes.  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
,
ULTRA2, and  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
Input Source  
Parameter Setting  
5.1-Channel  
dts  
5.1-Channel  
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES  
6.1-Channel  
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES  
DECODING: AUTO  
DECODING: ON  
DECODING: OFF  
Default  
Possible  
Settings  
&
FILM  
Parameter  
Setting  
+0.0dB  
ON  
OR  
@@ L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
@@@! L7 FILM  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup. Refer to the previous page for  
more information.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
ON  
ON, OFF  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
15ms  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-  
channel matrix-encoded dts-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-  
encoded dts-ES film sources.  
DECODING  
•
Uses an advanced matrix to derive seven channels from 5.1-  
and 6.1-channel sources. When both side and rear speakers are  
present, the  
perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening  
space.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
FILM listening mode also increases the  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
•
•
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-  
encoded dts-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES film  
sources.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
&
MUSIC  
ULTRA2 &  
OR  
OR  
@@@! @**  
MODE ADJUST  
@@@! L7 MUSIC  
@@ L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
@@ @** ULTRA2  
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the DECODING parameter  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present  
in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and the  
setting, and the speaker setup. Refer to page 5-22 for more  
information.  
speaker setup. The table at the bottom of the next page indicates  
the conditions in which THX ULTRA2 and dts-ES decoding are  
engaged.  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
•
The  
ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-  
channel matrix-encoded dts-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-  
encoded dts-ES music sources.  
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.  
•
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the  
parameter is set to OFF or when the  
is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
DECODING  
DECODING parameter  
•
•
Similar to the  
FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for music sources.  
•
•
The listening mode is available when dts-ES  
decoding is engaged.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded  
dts-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES music sources.  
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the  
DECODING parameter  
is set to ON or when the  
DECODING parameter is set to  
AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel  
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
•
•
The  
ULTRA2 and  
listening modes are not  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
available unless both side and rear speakers are present.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-  
encoded dts-ES, or 6.1-channel dts-ES discrete-encoded film  
sources.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
15ms  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
•
•
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel dts sources without  
dts-ES encoding.  
DECODING  
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
•
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
RE-EQUALIZER  
LFE MIX  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
When THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged:  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
•
•
Applies adaptive de-correlation to increase the perceived width  
of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround  
channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in  
home theaters.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
Input Source  
5.1-Channel  
5.1-Channel  
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES  
6.1-Channel  
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES  
dts  
Parameter Setting  
DECODING: AUTO  
ULTRA2  
ULTRA2  
DECODING: ON  
DECODING: OFF  
ULTRA2  
ULTRA2  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
MUSIC  
&
MODE ADJUST  
@@ @** MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
@@@*  
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts music sources.  
The MUSIC listening mode is not available unless both  
•
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup. Refer to page 5-22 for more  
information.  
•
side and rear speakers are present.  
•
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-  
encoded dts-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES  
sources.  
•
Recommended for home theaters in which the rear speakers  
are placed close together.  
Decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from dts(-ES)  
sources. The six main channels are full frequency. The .1  
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited  
frequency range of 120Hz.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
LFE MIX  
•
Appropriate for 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded  
dts-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES sources.  
+0.0dB  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
DECODING  
Note:  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
The  
MUSIC listening mode can only be  
activated with the front panel or remote control  
Mode buttons.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
&
2-CHAN  
5.1a FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
@@@* 2-CHAN  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a L7 FILM  
•
•
•
Designed for converting 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) input  
signals into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.  
•
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog film  
sources.  
Sends downmixed 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) input signals to  
the front speakers and the subwoofer.  
•
•
Derives seven channels from 5.1-channel analog sources.  
Recommended for recording purposes.  
Converts 5.1-channel analog input signals into digital audio for  
internal LOGIC7 decoding.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
•
•
Allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management,  
speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio  
controls (tone controls).  
Parameter  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
LFE MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
-25 to +5dB  
Recommended for 5.1-channel analog film sources.  
-5 to +5dB  
-127 to +127  
-5 to +5dB  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
+0dB  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
+0dB  
Parameter  
-20.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
DECODING  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
Refer to page 5-33  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
15ms  
+0.0dB  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1a  
ULTRA2, 5.1a  
SurEX, & 5.1a  
OR  
OR  
5.1a @**  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a @** ULTRA2  
5.1a @** SurEX  
•
A proprietary Lexicon listening mode.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present  
in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the  
speaker setup. The table at the top of the next page indicates the  
conditions in which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding  
are engaged.  
•
•
•
Similar to the 5.1a  
FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for music sources.  
Designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music  
sources.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
The 5.1a  
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.  
ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX  
Recommended for 5.1-channel analog music sources.  
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX  
parameter is set to OFF.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
The 5.1a  
Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
SurEX listening mode is available when THX  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND  
EX parameter is set to ON.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
The 5.1a  
Ultra2 and 5.1a  
SurEX listening modes are  
not available unless both side and rear speakers are present.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
The 5.1a listening mode is available when neither THX  
15ms  
+0.0Db  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
Ultra2 nor THX Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
5.1-Channel  
THX Surround EX  
Analog (Flagged)  
5.1-Channel  
THX Surround EX  
Analog (Non-Flagged)  
Input Source  
5.1-Channel  
Analog  
Parameter Setting  
SURROUND EX: ON  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
SURROUND EX: OFF  
ULTRA2  
ULTRA2  
ULTRA2  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog film sources.  
•
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel analog sources  
without THX Surround EX encoding.  
•
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
When THX Surround EX decoding is engaged:  
•
Applies matrix decoding to derive three surround channels  
from 5.1-channel analog sources.  
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
•
•
Converts 5.1-channel analog input signals into digital audio for  
internal THX processing.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
LFE MIX  
ON  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
Allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management,  
speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio  
controls (tone controls).  
+0.0dB  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
When THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged:  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
•
Applies adaptive de-correlation to increase the perceived width  
of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround  
channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in  
home theaters.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
5.1a  
MUSIC  
5.1a STANDARD  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a @** MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a STANDARD  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog music sources.  
The 5.1a MUSIC listening mode is not available unless  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources.  
Converts 5.1-channel analog input signals into digital audio for  
internal processing.  
both side and rear speakers are present.  
•
•
Applies ASA processing to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more  
information.  
•
Allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management,  
speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio  
controls (tone controls). When these features are not used, the  
5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS  
listening mode.  
Recommended for home theaters in which the rear speakers  
are placed close together.  
•
Sends identical signals (with appropriate time delays) to the  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L and Rear L  
as well as Side R and Rear R.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Note:  
The 5.1a  
MUSIC listening mode can only be  
activated with the front panel or remote control  
Mode buttons.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a BYPASS  
•
•
•
Designed for converting 5.1-channel analog input signals into  
2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.  
•
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as  
DVD-A or SACD players.  
Sends downmixed 5.1-channel analog input signals to the  
front speakers and the subwoofer.  
Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to  
the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors  
as shown on pages 2-7 and 3-58. These signals receive no  
internal processing.  
Recommended for recording purposes, particularly for  
recording from a DVD-A or multi-channel SACD player to a  
CD-R or another 2-channel recording format.  
•
•
When both side and rear speakers are present, surround channel  
signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers. To  
configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT LEVELS  
menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to deactivate the  
associated surround speakers.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
LFE MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
-25 to +5dB  
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated  
whenever the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector is  
assigned to the selected input. The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode  
is only available for 5.1-channel analog sources.  
-5 to +5dB  
-127 to +127  
-5 to +5dB  
+0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
Parameter  
-20.0 to +0.0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-32  
Refer to page 5-33  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
Refer to page 5-33  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Note:  
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and  
audio controls (tone controls) are not available when  
the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
2CH BYPASS  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
MODE ADJUST  
2CH BYPASS  
MODE ADJUST  
Listening Mode  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
•
Designed for playback of 2-channel analog sources.  
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu shown at  
the right, which can be used to adjust output  
levels for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Center, Subwoofer L/R,  
LFE, Side L/R, and Rear L/R.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
LFE  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
•
•
•
Sends analog audio input signals to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R. These signals receive no  
internal processing.  
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated  
whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN  
ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.  
The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode  
menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate  
multi-channel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter  
appears. For instance, the MONO listening mode menu includes a  
SUB L/R LVL parameter.  
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when a digital  
source is present and the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT  
parameter is set to AUTO.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Note:  
Parameter  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
LFE  
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and  
audio controls (tone controls) are not available when  
the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-34.  
Note:  
The OUTPUT LEVELS menu does not include the LFE  
parameter unless an LFE subwoofer is present.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions of  
the selected listening mode:  
CUSTOM  
MODE ADJUST  
Listening Mode  
CUSTOM  
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path shown in the  
previous column to open the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down  
menu shown at the bottom of the previous column.  
Opens the CUSTOM menu shown below, which can be used to  
compare custom and factory-default versions of the selected  
listening mode and to restore the factory-default version of the  
selected listening mode.  
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is  
open, press the remote control ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to  
toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM  
versions of the selected listening mode.  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
MODE ADJUST  
Listening Mode  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
3. When finished, press the ꢂ arrow button to close the CUSTOM  
VS PRESET drop down menu.  
Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default  
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected,  
the listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all  
listening mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default  
settings.  
RESET MODE  
MODE ADJUST  
Listening Mode  
CUSTOM  
RESET MODE  
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,  
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-  
default settings.  
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard it its  
custom condition, including all current listening mode menu  
parameter settings. The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the  
selected listening mode will sound identical when all listening  
mode menu parameters are set to their factory-default settings.  
To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening  
mode:  
1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE  
option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message  
shown below will appear on the on-screen display.  
Note:  
The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect  
current listening mode menu parameter settings.  
. . . Reset Mode continues on page 5-34  
PRESET  
CUSTOM  
PRESS RIGHT V  
TO RESTORE MODE  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
RESET MODE  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
RESET MODE  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
RESET MODE (continued from page 5-33)  
MODE ADJUST  
Listening Mode  
CUSTOM  
RESET MODE  
2. When RESET MODE message appears, press the ꢃ arrow button to restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode. Press  
the ꢂ arrow button to close the message without restoring the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.  
Note:  
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the  
corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.  
LISTENING MODE MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
ON, OFF  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
ON, OFF  
Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker setups. When  
ON is selected, the MC-12 provides an increased sense of spaciousness  
and envelopment through the surround speakers. This enhancement  
is most noticeable when the surround speakers are positioned to  
the sides of the primary listening position or when the primary  
listening position is located against the rear wall. The effectiveness  
of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best results,  
it is recommended to position the surround speakers to the left and  
right sides of the primary listening position.  
Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When ON is selected, the MC-12  
continually monitors 2-channel input signals and automatically  
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to  
ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with  
maximum separation. When OFF is selected, the accuracy of  
the selected listening mode varies among input sources. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast  
sources and to OFF for music sources.  
BASS CONTENT  
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO  
ACADEMY FILTER  
Selecting the ON setting restores the proper tonal balance of older  
mono film sources that have much narrower frequency responses  
than more recent mono film sources.  
ON, OFF  
Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono, and stereo recordings.  
When set to BINAURL, the MC-12 activates low-frequency  
compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded  
with dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for  
input sources recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting  
for input sources recorded with stereo bass.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
BASS ENHANCE  
ON, OFF  
CENTER  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Selecting the ON setting enhances stereo bass, which results in  
low-frequency reproduction that is less localizable and more  
realistic in the listening space. The effectiveness of the BASS  
ENHANCE parameter varies depending on room acoustics and the  
ability of the surround speakers to reproduce low frequencies. It is  
recommended to use front, side, or rear speakers that are capable  
of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz or lower.  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector  
labeled Center.  
CENTER DEPTH  
0 to 18  
Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,  
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher  
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance  
of the center speaker from the primary listening position.  
Note:  
When the BASS ENHANCE parameter is set to ON,  
most listening spaces have a 2 to 3dB reduction in  
low-frequency energy. Set the AUDIO CONTROLS  
menu BASS parameter to compensate for this  
reduction.  
CENTER MIX  
-25 to +5dB  
Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +0dB for film sources and  
-5dB for music sources.  
BASS RT  
5ms to 48.6s  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
-127 to +127  
Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount  
of time required for low-frequency information to decay below  
60dB in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the  
MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller  
listening spaces. The full parameter range might not be available  
depending on the MID RT and SIZE parameter settings.  
Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +0 unless the center  
channel is not properly timed and the value of the error is known.  
COMPRESSION  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialog intelligibility  
at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital sources. When ON is  
selected, full compression is applied regardless of volume level.  
When OFF is selected, compression is not applied. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to AUTO or ON for Dolby  
Digital sources that are listened to at lower volume levels, especially  
for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others.  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, or SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
CALIBRATION  
Opens the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu, which can be used to  
calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to page 5-12 for  
more information.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-36  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions  
(continued from page 5-35)  
EFFECT LVL  
-12 to +6dB  
Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode.  
CTR WIDTH  
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
DECODING  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Adjusts the center image. When MIN is selected, the center image  
is heard from just the center speaker. When MAX is selected, the  
center image is heard from just the front left and right speakers as  
a “phantom” center image. When a value between 1 and 6 is  
selected, the center image is heard in various combinations of the  
front and center speakers.  
Controls the dts-ES decoding feature, which can be used to extract  
a rear channel from 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded  
dts-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES sources. When  
ON is selected, dts-ES decoding is engaged for all dts(-ES) sources.  
When OFF is selected, dts-ES decoding is not engaged for all  
dts(-ES) sources.  
CUSTOM  
When AUTO is selected, dts-ES decoding is engaged when a  
5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded  
dts-ES source is detected. dts-ES decoding is not engaged when a  
5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom  
and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to  
restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode.  
Refer to page 5-33 for more information.  
listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is  
engaged.  
is not engaged. Refer to the  
page 5-22 for more information.  
listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-  
default versions of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-33  
for information.  
Decoding section that begins on  
Note the following:  
•
dts-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear  
speakers are present.  
DIMENSION  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which enables  
certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among all  
speakers. When FRONT is selected, the sound field is balanced  
toward the front of the listening space. When NEUTRAL is selected,  
the sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space.  
When REAR is selected, the sound field is balanced toward the rear  
of the listening space.  
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control dts button while a dts(-ES) source is present  
adjusts the  
DECODING parameter, cycling through the  
AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
•
The  
DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel dts  
source is present or when the DECODING parameter is set  
STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the  
is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not  
engaged. Refer to the DIGITAL EX & DIGITAL listening mode  
descriptions that begin on page 5-19 for more information.  
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel  
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is present.  
Note the following:  
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless  
both side and rear speakers are present.  
EX DECODING  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Controls the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding feature, which  
can be used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital sources recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround  
EX. When ON is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is  
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is  
selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source is present activates the  
DIGITAL EX or  
DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the EX  
DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and  
OFF settings.  
FRONT STEERING  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is  
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source  
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non-  
flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without  
Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.  
Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center  
speakers. When FILM is selected, maximum front steering is  
applied to the center channel. When MUSIC is selected, moderate  
front steering is applied. When MSURR is selected, minimum front  
steering is applied. When OFF is selected, no front steering is  
applied. It is recommended to set this parameter to FILM for film  
and broadcast sources and to MUSIC, MSURR, or OFF for music  
sources.  
Note:  
The MC-12 cannot automatically detect Dolby  
Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged  
input source does not include information in the input  
signal that identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoding.  
INPUT BALANCE  
Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input  
connectors, compensating for input sources with audible channel  
imbalance.  
L< to <|> to >R  
The DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby Digital  
Surround EX decoding is engaged. The DIGITAL listening mode  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-38  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions  
(continued from page 5-37)  
Note:  
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend  
past the location of the front left and right speakers.  
LFE  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector  
labeled LFE. The OUTPUT LEVELS menu does not include the LFE  
parameter unless an LFE subwoofer is present.  
LIVENESS  
30ms to 20.2s  
Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter  
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic  
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time.  
LFE MIX  
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB  
Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a  
5.1- or 6.1-channel source – that is sent to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R and LFE. Low frequencies  
from up to seven other channels might be combined with the  
LFE information to create the subwoofer output signal, which  
significantly increases subwoofer output levels.  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
Applies low-frequency spatial correction to un-correlated input  
signals below 60Hz.  
-25 to +25dB  
MASTER LEVEL  
-5 to +5dB  
Adjusts the output level of 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded sources.  
Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper  
tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When  
the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is  
mixed into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP  
menu parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points.  
MID RT  
24ms to 24.3s  
Works with the BASS RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount  
of time required for mid-frequency information to decay below  
60dB in level. The full parameter range might not be available  
depending on the BASS RT and SIZE parameter settings.  
LISTENER POS  
-127 to +127  
Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered  
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within  
the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of  
an inch. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-12  
for more information about the LISTENER POS parameter.  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, or SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which can be used to adjust  
output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Center, Subwoofer L/R, LFE, Side L/R, and Rear L/R. Refer to page  
5-32 for more information.  
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying  
the arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended to  
increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are  
located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired  
in the listening space.  
PANORAMA  
ON, OFF  
REAR L/R  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Selecting the ON setting extends the front stereo image to include  
surround channel signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect  
with side wall imaging.  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectors  
labeled Rear L/R.  
Note:  
RESET MODE  
The  
PLII MUSIC listening mode PANORAMA  
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,  
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-  
default settings.  
parameter should not be confused with the separate  
PANORAMA listening mode.  
PRE-DELAY  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
ROLLOFF  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of  
reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound  
larger. Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, it  
is recommended to begin with the parameter set to OFF, then  
make adjustments accordingly.  
Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in real spaces. It is rec-  
ommended to begin with a low setting to simulate high-  
frequency absorptive spaces.  
SIDE L/R  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectors  
labeled Side L/R.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON, OFF  
Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.  
When ON is selected, the MC-12 applies a high-frequency filter.  
When OFF is selected, the MC-12 does not apply a high-frequency  
filter. It is recommended to set this parameter to ON for film  
sources, as many films are mixed for movie theaters and might  
sound too bright when played back in home theaters without  
re-equalization.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-40  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions  
(continued from page 5-39)  
Note:  
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived  
direction of the sound, although both the front left  
and right speakers generate the external calibration  
source signal.  
SIZE  
4 to 20 or 30m  
Adjusts listening space length within a 4 to 20 or 30m range  
(depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of the space  
to increase the reverb effect. The full parameter range might not be  
available depending on the BASS RT and MID RT parameter settings.  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
10 to 90deg  
Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the  
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle  
between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening  
position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-12  
for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, or SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
SOUND STAGE  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
SPEECH DETECT  
ON, OFF  
Dynamically controls the relative balance of the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. When FRONT is  
selected, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are attenuated by 6dB,  
shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the front of the  
listening space. When NEUTRAL is selected, Side L/R and Rear L/R  
output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the perceived  
balance of the sound field to the center of the listening space.  
When REAR is selected, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not  
attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.  
Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When  
ON is selected, effects are lowered to minimize interference and  
unnatural echo in monaural speech. When stereo sources are  
present, the front left and right channels are independently used as  
inputs for ambience synthesis. When strong monaural speech is  
present in the input source, the monaural component of the  
ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect  
is increased. When OFF is selected, the amount of ambience  
synthesis is dynamically controlled.  
SOURCE  
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT  
SUB L/R & SUB L/R LVL  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode  
external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the sound  
is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening position.  
When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come from the left  
of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT is selected,  
the sound is perceived to come from all around the primary listening  
position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-12  
for more information about the SOURCE parameter.  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectors  
labeled Subwoofer L/R. The SUB L/R parameter appears on the  
listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB L/R LVL parameter  
appears on listening mode menus when the listening mode does  
not accommodate multi-channel output signals.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
MC-12  
THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital  
Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX Ultra2 listening  
modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not  
SURR ROLLOFF  
Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only  
applied to output signals generated by the MC-12.  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
engaged. Refer to the 5.1  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX, & 5.1  
listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-17, the  
ULTRA2 &  
page 5-24, or the 5.1a  
listening mode descriptions that begin on  
ULTRA2, 5.1a SurEX, & 5.1a  
SURROUND DLY  
0 to 15ms  
listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-28 for more  
information.  
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying  
the arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is  
recommended to increase the setting when a greater sense of  
depth is desired in the listening space.  
Note the following:  
•
•
•
•
The SURROUND EX parameter AUTO setting is not available for  
the 5.1a THX listening modes.  
SURROUND EX  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be  
used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
sources. When ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is  
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is  
selected, THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low-  
level clicks in the front speakers.  
THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both  
side and rear speakers are present.  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
source is present activates the 5.1  
or 5.1 listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the  
SURROUND EX parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON,  
and OFF settings.  
ULTRA2, 5.1  
SurEX,  
When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged  
when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX  
Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is  
not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source  
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel analog source  
is present activates the 5.1a  
5.1a listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle the  
ULTRA2, 5.1a  
SurEX, or  
Note:  
The MC-12 cannot automatically detect THX  
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source  
does not include information in the input signal that  
identifies THX Surround EX encoding.  
SURROUND EX parameter between the ON and OFF settings.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-42  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
Lexicon  
Listening Mode Menu Parameter Descriptions  
(continued from page 5-41)  
SURROUND MIX  
-5 to +5dB  
Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to  
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +2 or +3dB for all input  
sources.  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
Controls the level of dialog boost in the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog  
intelligibility, particularly at lower volume levels.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Lexicon  
The MC-12 is powered on, but there is no audio.  
1. Examine the audio cables to ensure a solid connection between  
the MC-12 and all associated power amplifiers.  
The MC-12 does not power on.  
2. Make sure volume is set to an audible level. Volume level can  
be increased with the front panel volume knob or the remote  
control VOL + and – buttons.  
1. Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the|(“on”)  
position.  
2. Attempt to deactivate standby mode with both the front panel  
and remote control standby buttons.  
3. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE  
ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear on the on-screen and  
front panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate  
mute, press the Mute button or adjust volume level.  
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a solid connection between  
the AC input connector and the wall outlet.  
4. Examine the electrical circuit and breaker.  
4. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN  
parameters to make sure the appropriate audio connector is  
assigned to the selected input.  
The remote control does not work.  
5. Make sure the MC-12 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,  
follow the instructions that begin on page 2-20 to open the  
status menu for the current input source.  
1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the  
front panel IR receiver. When the MC-12 is not using the rear  
panel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line-of-  
sight with the front panel IR receiver for proper operation. The  
remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight  
or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.  
6. Make sure all associated power amplifiers are powered on.  
Dialog sounds muffled.  
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted  
with the proper polarity.  
1. If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make  
sure a custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected.  
Then, make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter  
is set to NONE.  
3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are  
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage  
condition that prevents it from operating the MC-12.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
MC-12  
A humming sound is present in the audio.  
The MC-12 is exhibiting erratic behavior.  
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from  
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground  
loop isolation device is required. Contact an authorized  
Lexicon dealer or the cable provider for assistance.  
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait  
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to  
the|(“on”) position.  
2. Use the MC-12 configuration tool to download the current  
MC-12 configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document  
all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet that  
begins on page A-19. Then, follow the instructions on the next  
page to restore factory-default settings.  
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.  
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated  
component is properly grounded and connected to the same  
electrical circuit as the MC-12.  
If all else fails . . .  
The MC-12 is powered on, but there is no video.  
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait  
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to  
the|(“on”) position.  
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-video cables –  
to ensure a solid connection between the MC-12 and the  
associated component.  
2. Use the MC-12 configuration tool to download the current  
MC-12 configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document  
all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet that  
begins on page A-19. Then, follow the instructions on the next  
page to restore factory-default settings.  
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN  
parameters to make sure the appropriate video connector is  
assigned to the selected input.  
RF interference is present in the audio or video signal.  
3. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.  
1. Make sure the MC-12 is not positioned near unshielded TV or  
FM antennas, cable TV decoders, and other RF-emitting  
devices.  
4. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or www.  
lexicon.com.  
2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables whenever  
possible.  
Note:  
Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/  
kbase for answers to frequently asked questions and  
additional troubleshooting information.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
Lexicon  
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE  
RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS  
The following routine maintenance should be performed on a  
periodic basis:  
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and  
user-defined values are restored to their factory-default settings.  
Before restoring factory-default settings, it is recommended to  
record user-defined settings.  
•
Clean the MC-12 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do  
not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners, or strong  
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel  
wool or metal polish. If the MC-12 is exposed to a dusty  
environment, a low-pressure blower can be used to remove  
dust from its exterior surface.  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
EXIT  
HAVE BEEN RESTORED  
PRESS ANY KEY  
TO RESTART  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
•
Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote  
control requires two AA batteries. It is recommended to use  
Alkaline batteries, which last longer without leaking. Refer to  
page 1-5 for remote control battery installation instructions.  
To restore factory-default settings:  
1. Select one of the following options to record user defined  
settings:  
Note:  
•
Use the Configuration Tool to download current MC-12  
settings to a personal computer (PC). The configuration  
tool is available at www.lexicon.com/mc12/downloads.  
asp.  
When the batteries are low on power, the remote  
control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it  
from operating the MC-12. Normal operation will  
resume when new batteries are installed.  
•
Record user-defined settings on the installation worksheet  
that begins on page A-19.  
2. If applicable, press the standby button to activate standby  
mode.  
3. When standby mode is activated, press the standby button to  
deactivate standby mode.  
4. After the standby button is pressed, quickly press and hold the  
Mute button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown above  
opens on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
MC-12  
Note:  
The Mute button must be pressed within 2 seconds of  
deactivating standby mode. Otherwise, the "MUTE  
ON" message will appear on the on-screen and front  
panel displays. If this occurs, too much time has  
passed. Begin again with step 2.  
5. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
option.  
•
•
Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to restore factory-  
default settings.  
Highlight the EXIT option to close the FACTORY SETTINGS  
menu without restoring factory-default settings.  
6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the ꢂ arrow  
button to select this option.  
•
If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the FACTORY  
SETTINGS message shown on the previous page will appear on  
the on-screen and front panel displays. When this message  
appears, press a front panel or remote control button to restart  
the MC-12.  
•
If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu  
will close and the two-line status will open on the on-screen  
and front panel displays.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Appendix  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Menu Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5  
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio Input & Output Connectors  
Main Zone Audio Performance (continued)  
Analog Audio Inputs  
• 8 stereo (RCA) or 5 stereo and one 5.1-channel  
connectors  
THD + Noise  
• Below 0.003% at 1kHz, maximum output level  
• 108dB minimum, 111dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth  
Dynamic Range  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Input Sensitivity  
Digital Audio Inputs  
• 6 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA), 6 S/PDIF optical (5 TosLink and  
1 optical mini jack), and 1 AES/EBU (XLR) connectors  
• 108dB minimum, 111dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth  
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-  
958, S/PDIF standards  
• 200mVrms (2Vrms for maximum output level) at 0dB  
input gain  
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz sample rates  
Input Impedance  
Output Level  
• 100k in parallel with 150pF  
• Accepts 16-24 bits PCM audio, Dolby Digital, dts, and  
dts-ES discrete data formats  
• 150mVrms typical, 6Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)  
• 300mVrms typical, 12Vrms maximum (XLR connectors,  
MC-12 Balanced only)  
Main Zone Audio  
Outputs  
• 12 unbalanced (RCA) and 12 balanced (XLR, MC-12  
Balanced only) connectors for Front L/R, Center, LFE,  
Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, Rear L/R, and Auxiliary L/R  
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume  
at +12dB  
Zone 2 Audio Outputs • 2 unbalanced (RCA, 1 fixed and 1 variable output level)  
stereo connectors and 1 balanced stereo connector  
Output Impedance  
• 100 in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)  
(XLR, variable output level, MC-12 Balanced only)  
• 50 in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors, MC-12  
Balanced only)  
Record Zone Audio  
Outputs  
• 2 unbalanced (RCA, 1 fixed and 1 variable output level)  
stereo connectors  
• 1 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and 1 S/PDIF optical (TosLink)  
connector (in parallel)  
Zone 2 & Record Zone Audio Performance  
A/D Conversion  
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, dual-bit  
(Record Zone only)  
architecture  
Main Zone Audio Performance  
D/A Conversion  
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit  
architecture  
A/D Conversion  
D/A Conversion  
• 24-bit, 96kHz, dual-bit  
architecture  
Frequency Response  
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz,  
reference 1kHz  
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit  
operating in dual-mono mode  
architecture,  
THD + Noise  
• Below 0.005% at 1kHz, maximum output level  
• 105dB minimum, 108dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth  
Frequency Response  
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz,  
reference 1kHz  
Dynamic Range  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
Zone 2 & Record Zone Audio Performance (continued)  
Composite & S-video Performance (continued)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Input Sensitivity  
Input Impedance  
Output Level  
• 105dB minimum, 108dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth  
• 200mVrms (4Vrms for maximum output level)  
• 100k in parallel with 150pF  
Input Return Loss  
Differential Gain  
Differential Phase  
Bandwidth  
• >40dB  
• <0.5%  
• <0.5°  
• 200mVrms typical, 4Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)  
• >25MHz  
• <0.3%  
• 400mVrms typical, 8Vrms maximum (XLR connectors,  
Zone 2 only, MC-12 Balanced only)  
K Factor  
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume  
at 0dB  
Gain  
•
0.15dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Frequency Response  
• >70dB  
Output Impedance  
• 100 in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)  
• 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/-0.3dB  
• 50 in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors, Zone 2  
only, MC-12 Balanced only)  
Component Video Performance  
Video Input & Output Connectors  
Compatibility  
Switching  
• 3-channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent  
Video Inputs  
• 5 composite (RCA), 8 S-video, and 4 component  
• Passive  
• 75  
video (3 RCA and 1 BNC)  
Impedance  
Insertion Loss  
Bandwidth  
Video Outputs  
• 4 composite (RCA, 2 monitor and 2 Record Zone), 2  
S-video (2 monitor and 2 Record Zone), and 1  
component (BNC)  
• <3dB  
• >300MHz  
Composite & S-video Performance  
Microphone Input Connectors  
Compatibility  
Switching  
• NTSC, PAL, and SECAM  
• Active  
Inputs  
• 4 3.5mm miniature phone jacks  
• 10mVrms (400mV maximum input level)  
Input Sensitivity  
Input Impedance  
Output Level  
Impedance  
• 1.0V peak-to-peak  
• 75  
• 20k (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)  
. . . Specifications continues on page A-4  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Specifications (continued from page A-3)  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Other  
Application of Council Directive(s):  
Trigger Outputs  
• 1 power on/off and 2 programmable connectors on  
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)  
89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC  
RS-232 Serial Input/ • 2 9-pin D-sub connectors  
Output  
Standard(s) to which Conformity is Declared:  
Power Requirements  
• 90-250 VAC, 50-60Hz, 90W (universal line input),  
detachable power cord  
EN55022:1998, EN55024:1998, EN61000-3-2: 2000,  
EN61000-3-3:2000, and EN60065: 1998  
MC-12  
Dimensions & Weight  
• Height (with feet): 5.2 inches (132mm)  
• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)  
• Depth: 14.85 inches (377mm)  
• Weight: 36lbs (16.4kg)  
Manufacturer:  
Lexicon, Inc.  
3 Oak Park  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
MC-12 Balanced  
Dimensions & Weight  
• Height (with feet): 6.63 inches (169mm)  
• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)  
• Depth: 14.85 inches (377mm)  
• Weight: 45lbs (20.5kg)  
The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s)  
and Standard(s) specified above.  
Rack Mounting  
Environment  
• Optional brackets are available for installation in a  
standard 19" equipment rack (2 rack units required  
for MC-12; 3 rack units required for MC-12 Balanced).  
Type of Equipment:  
Model:  
Digital Controller  
Lexicon MC-12  
June 2001  
• Operating Temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)  
• Storage Temperature: -30° to 75°C (-22° to 167°F)  
• Relative Humidity: 95% maximum without condensation  
Date:  
Remote Control  
• Hand-held, backlit infrared remote control unit  
Lexicon, Inc.  
Vice President of Engineering  
3 Oak Park  
• Requires 2 AA batteries (Alkaline batteries recommended)  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
Tel: 781-280-0300  
Fax: 781-280-0490  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REMOTE ONLY  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
RECORD INPUTS  
FILM  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Appendix  
MC-12  
MENU TREES  
Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGERS option prompts the  
selection of the desired trigger output connector.  
Selecting a connector opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu  
shown at the far right. The parameters on the left side of  
the TRIGGER SETUP menu are identical regardless of  
which connector is selected. The TRIGGER SETUP menu  
shown at the far right indicates factory-default parameter  
settings for both connectors.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
TRIGGER SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
TRIGGER 1  
TRIGGER 2  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
INPUT SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
OR  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP UNLOCKED  
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED  
MODES UNLOCKED  
PRO LOGIC  
R
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL  
ZONE PWR ON  
REC PWR ON  
-30dB  
-30dB  
-30dB  
-30dB  
FILM  
R
MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
LOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
-10dB  
-20dB  
-30dB  
-40dB  
FULL MUTE  
continued on page A-6  
5.1 MUSIC  
5.1  
5.1  
SurEX  
MUSIC  
SPEAKER SETUP  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
OFF  
OFF  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
MANUAL  
STATUS  
2 SECONDS  
TOP  
STATUS  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALWAYS ON  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
100%  
SET CROSSOVERS  
FILM  
MUSIC  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
NTSC  
ON  
ON  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
TOP  
CENTER  
BOTTOM  
100%  
MC-12  
continued on page A-9  
^
75%  
50%  
25%  
MUSIC  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS  
ON  
OFF  
2-CHAN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
SECAM  
PAL  
ON  
OFF  
NTSC  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
MUSIC  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
A-5  
ON  
OFF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-5)  
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of the desired input (i.e.  
DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below.  
The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of  
which input is selected. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate factory-default  
parameter settings for each input.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
continued from page A-5  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
LD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
SAT INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
GAME INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TUNER INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
LD  
SAT  
CD  
COAX-4  
NONE  
GAME  
NAME  
TUNER  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-3  
ANALOG-1  
AUTO  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-2  
ANALOG-3  
AUTO  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
OPTICAL-4  
ANALOG-6  
AUTO  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
NONE  
ANALOG-8  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
S-VIDEO-3  
S-VIDEO-5  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
NONE  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
4
TV  
1
1
FILM  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1 TV  
FILM  
D
5.1 MUSIC  
MUSIC  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1 MUSIC  
MUSIC  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
5.1a FILM  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
ANLG  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DVD2 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TV INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
VCR INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TAPE INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
AUX INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
PVR INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD2  
TV  
VCR  
NONE  
TAPE  
AUX  
PVR  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-2  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-1  
ANALOG-2  
AUTO  
DIGITAL IN  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
OPTICAL-5  
ANALOG-7  
AUTO  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
OPTICAL-6  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-3  
ANALOG-5  
AUTO  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
ANALOG-4  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-6  
AUTO  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-2  
S-VIDEO-4  
NONE  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-3  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
S-VIDEO-7  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
2
FILM  
3
TV  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
1
1
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1 TV  
FILM  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
D
5.1 MUSIC  
MUSIC  
D
5.1 MUSIC  
MUSIC  
D
5.1 TV  
FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
5.1a FILM  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
ANLG  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the  
corresponding menu shown below. These menus are  
identical regardless of which input is selected. The MAIN  
ADV and RECORD ADV menus shown on the next page  
indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
AUTO  
OFF  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
DMIX  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1 VIDEO IN  
DVD1 2-CH MODE  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
MODE  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
ANALOG-6  
ANALOG-7 5.1 ANLG (6-8)  
ANALOG-8  
NONE  
COMPOSITE-1  
COMPOSITE-2  
COMPOSITE-3  
COMPOSITE-4  
COMPOSITE-5  
S-VIDEO-1  
S-VIDEO-2  
S-VIDEO-3  
S-VIDEO-4  
S-VIDEO-5  
S-VIDEO-6  
S-VIDEO-7  
S-VIDEO-8  
NONE  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
FILM  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
5.1 MUSIC  
5.1  
PRESS MENU V TO  
RESTORE INPUT NAME  
OFF  
DIGITAL  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
ON  
OFF  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
DVD-1  
^
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
USE LAST  
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS  
DVD1 RECORD ADV  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ON  
+0dB  
DVD1  
MODE  
FILM  
MUSIC  
DVD1 DIGITAL IN  
COAX-1  
COAX-2  
COAX-3  
COAX-4  
COAX-5  
COAX-6  
OPTICAL-1  
OPTICAL-2  
OPTICAL-3  
OPTICAL-4  
OPTICAL-5  
OPTICAL-6  
AES/EBU  
NONE  
ENABLED  
DVD1 COMPONENT  
AUTO GAIN  
+0.0dB  
BLOCKED  
ENABLED  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
COMPONENT-1  
COMPONENT-2  
COMPONENT-3  
COMPONENT-4  
0
-6  
2-CHAN  
USE LAST  
USE LAST  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INPUT  
96kHz  
88.2kHz  
48kHz  
-45  
DVD1 5.1a MODE  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1a  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
USE LAST  
-18 to +12dB  
44.1kHz  
-18 to +12dB  
ON  
OFF  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-7)  
The MAIN ADV and RECORD ADV menus shown below  
indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
FILM  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
D
5.1 FILM  
FILM  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
SAT MAIN ADV  
GAME MAIN ADV  
DVD1 RECORD ADV  
SAT RECORD ADV  
GAME RECORD ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
DVD2 MAIN ADV  
VCR MAIN ADV  
TAPE MAIN ADV  
DVD2 RECORD ADV  
VCR RECORD ADV  
TAPE RECORD ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ANALOG  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
RECORD  
BLOCKED  
BLOCKED  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
LD MAIN ADV  
CD MAIN ADV  
TUNER MAIN ADV  
LD RECORD ADV  
CD RECORD ADV  
TUNER RECORD ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ANALOG  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
TV MAIN ADV  
PVR MAIN ADV  
AUX MAIN ADV  
TV RECORD ADV  
PVR RECORD ADV  
AUX RECORD ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ENABLED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
+0dB  
OFF  
44.1kHz  
RECORD  
BLOCKED  
RECORD  
ENABLED  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CROSSOVER SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
60Hz  
RR  
60Hz  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
40Hz  
60Hz  
C
L
continued from page A-5  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
60Hz 60Hz  
40Hz  
40Hz  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SPEAKER SETUP  
THX SETUP  
THX REAR SPEAKERS  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
40Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
60Hz  
MONO  
40Hz  
OFF  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
SUB XOVER  
LFE  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
THX 80Hz  
NONE  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
THX 80Hz  
CONFIGURATION  
OFF  
ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
APART  
CLOSE  
TOGETHER  
APART  
CLOSE  
TOGETHER  
BGC  
ASA  
BGC  
ASA  
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS  
CENTER SPEAKER  
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS  
REAR L/R SPEAKERS  
SUBWOOFERS L/R  
SUB XOVER  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
MONO  
STEREO  
NONE  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-9)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
CHECKING FOR SILENCE  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
CHECKING MICROPHONES  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
GROUP MICROPHONES  
INTO A BUNDLE IN THE  
MIDDLE OF THE ROOM  
PLEASE WAIT  
PLEASE WAIT  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
MANUAL  
PRESS V TO BEGIN  
SET CROSSOVERS  
MIC CHECK  
LOCK OPTIONS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
or  
When an ERROR message  
appears on the last CHECK  
MICROPHONES screen,  
(MICROPHONE)  
NOT DETECTED  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
DISTANCES  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
MIC 1  
MIC 2  
MIC 3  
MIC 4  
ERROR  
OK  
OK  
0K  
or  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
press the  
ꢀ
and  
ꢁ
(MICROPHONE)  
MANUAL  
arrow buttons to highlight  
the desired microphone.  
Then, press the ꢂ arrow  
button to view more  
details about the error.  
One of the messages  
shown at the left will  
appear on the on-screen  
display.  
SIGNAL TOO LOW  
PLACE MICROPHONES  
IN PRIMARY LISTENING  
POSITIONS  
or  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
(MICROPHONE)  
OUT OF RANGE  
(MICROPHONE)  
OK  
or  
When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK  
MICROPHONES screen, pressing the ꢃ arrow button  
opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no ERROR  
message appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES  
screen, pressing the ꢃ arrow button opens the AUTO  
SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
(MICROPHONE)  
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE  
A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
DISTANCES  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
TEST WILL BEGIN IN  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
10  
10  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
MANUAL  
YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC  
TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR  
SIT QUIETLY  
PRESS V TO SKIP  
COUNTDOWN  
PLACE MICROPHONES  
IN PRIMARY LISTENING  
POSITIONS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
LOCK OPTIONS  
PRESS V TO BEGIN  
COUNTDOWN  
MIC CHECK REQUIRED  
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION  
or  
When the MC-12 is finished calibrating speaker  
distances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER  
SETUP results screen shown at the left will open on  
the on-screen display, indicating the results for each  
calibration procedure. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow  
buttons to highlight the desired calibration procedure.  
Then, press the ꢂ arrow button to select this procedure.  
Selecting DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES  
screen shown below. Selecting the LEVELS option  
opens the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.  
SETTING DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
SETTING LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
DISTANCES  
LEVELS  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
+0.0dB  
OK  
OK  
DISTANCES  
LEVELS  
ERROR  
ERROR  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
AUTO VALUES APPLIED  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
AUTO VALUES APPLIED  
PRESS V TO VIEW  
DETAILS  
LEVELS  
OK  
N/A  
N/A  
DISTANCES  
OK  
The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens  
shown at the right indicate the individual calibration  
results for each speaker. Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow  
buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration  
parameter. Then, press the ꢂ arrow button to view  
more detailed results for the selected speaker.  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE  
AUTO LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
AUTO DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
ERROR  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
ERROR  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW  
(SPEAKER)  
SIGNAL TOO LOW  
(SPEAKER)  
UNABLE TO CALCULATE  
Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to the AUTO  
SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).  
Then, press the ꢂ arrow button to select the other  
calibration procedure or press the the ꢃ arrow button  
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
(SPEAKER)  
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE  
N/A  
N/A  
(SPEAKER)  
(SPEAKER)  
OK  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED  
OK  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-11)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
DISTANCES & LEVELS  
DISTANCES  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
TEST WILL BEGIN IN  
10  
10  
SPEAKERS  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MANUAL  
YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC  
TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR  
SIT QUIETLY  
PRESS V TO SKIP  
COUNTDOWN  
PLACE MICROPHONES  
IN PRIMARY LISTENING  
POSITIONS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
PRESS V TO BEGIN  
COUNTDOWN  
MIC CHECK REQUIRED  
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION  
SETTING DISTANCES  
SETTING LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates  
the individual calibration results for each speaker.  
Press the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the  
desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the  
ꢂ arrow button to view more detailed results for the  
selected speaker.  
The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the  
individual calibration results for each speaker. Press  
the ꢀ and ꢁ arrow buttons to highlight the desired  
speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the ꢂ  
arrow button to view more detailed results for the  
selected speaker.  
N/A  
N/A  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH  
SET DISTANCES  
AUTO DISTANCES  
ORIGINAL DISTANCES  
AUTO DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
SET LEVELS  
AUTO LEVELS  
ORIGINAL LEVELS  
AUTO LEVELS  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
ERROR  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
ERROR  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
(SPEAKER)  
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW  
(SPEAKER)  
SIGNAL TOO LOW  
R
SR  
0.0ft  
RR  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
(SPEAKER)  
UNABLE TO CALCULATE  
(SPEAKER)  
OK  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
C
L
C
0.0dB  
(SPEAKER)  
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED  
M
SUB  
N/A  
M
SUB  
N/A  
SL RL  
0.0ft 0.0ft  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
(SPEAKER)  
OK  
ORIGINAL DISTANCES  
APPLIED  
AUTO DISTANCES  
APPLIED  
ORIGINAL LEVELS  
APPLIED  
AUTO LEVELS  
APPLIED  
(SPEAKER)  
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED  
A-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
SPEAKER SETUP  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SET CROSSOVERS  
CHECK MICROPHONES  
AUTOMATIC  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MANUAL  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGERS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
R
SR  
0.0dB  
RR  
0.0dB  
SET CROSSOVERS  
BEFORE CALIBRATING  
0.0dB  
C
0.0dB  
M
SUB  
L
SL RL  
0.0dB 0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
INTERNAL NOISE  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
CAL NOISE  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
N/A  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
ON  
ON  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
N/A  
L/R LIMITER  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
LFE LIMITER  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
MONO SUB  
SUB RIGHT  
LFE  
100dB  
ON  
100dB  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
N/A  
N/A  
UNITS  
FEET  
METERS  
FEET  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
75 to 120dB  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
RECORD BALANCE  
<|>  
<|>  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
B<  
<|>  
>F  
ON  
OFF  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-14)  
Selecting the MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu shown at the left, which prompts  
the selection of the desired listening mode. Selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode  
menu shown on pages A-14 to A-16. The parameters on the left side of the listening mode menus differ from  
listening mode to listening mode. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. The listening mode menus  
shown here indicate factory-default parameter settings for each listening mode. Listening mode menu parameter  
drop-down menus are shown on pages A-16 to A-17.  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
FILM  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
R
PRO LOGIC  
R
CHURCH  
FILM  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
MUSIC SURR  
FILM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
FILM  
R
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
MID RT  
BASS RT  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5
ON  
20m  
1.56s  
1.87s  
24ms  
2.4kHz  
-3dB  
ON  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
FRONT STEERING MSURR  
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
ON  
REAR  
ON  
OFF  
7.0kHz  
ON  
OFF  
7.0kHz  
R
MUSIC  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
NIGHTCLUB  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
11  
ON  
5m  
PLII +  
5.1 FILM  
5.1 TV  
5.1 MUSIC  
CATHEDRAL  
TV  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
MID RT  
BASS RT  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
12  
ON  
30m  
3.72s  
4.47s  
23ms  
3.1kHz  
-8dB  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
ON  
LIVENESS  
196ms  
5ms  
9.0kHz  
+3dB  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1  
5.1  
*
FRONT STEERING  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
FILM  
OFF  
REAR  
ON  
OFF  
7.0kHz  
MUSIC  
DIGITAL*  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
FILM*  
PLII MOVIE  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
CONCERT HALL  
PLII MUSIC  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
12  
ON  
20m  
1.72s  
OFF  
2.4kHz  
-2dB  
MUSIC*  
*
MUSIC  
PANORAMA  
CTR WIDTH  
DIMENSION  
SURROUND DLY  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
3
NEUTRAL  
10ms  
PANORAMA  
EFFECT LVL  
BASS CONTENT STEREO  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
INPUT BALANCE  
CALIBRATION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
LIVENESS  
*
MUSIC  
+4dB  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
2-CHAN*  
5.1a FILM  
5.1a MUSIC  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
FRONT STEERING MUSIC  
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0  
3.1kHz  
5.1a  
5.1a  
*
ON  
OFF  
7.0kHz  
PRO LOGIC  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
<|>  
MUSIC  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
*
These listening mode names differ  
depending on the current input  
source, speaker setup, and parameter  
settings. Refer to the Listening Mode  
Descriptions section that begins on  
page 5-7 for more information.  
2CH BYPASS  
A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
2-CH SURROUND  
5.1 TV  
DIGITAL  
FILM  
5.1a  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
EX DECODING  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
AUTO  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
LFE MIX  
DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
2-CHANNEL  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
+0dB  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
LFE MIX  
DECODING  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
2-CHAN  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
LFE MIX  
DECODING  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
5.1a  
MUSIC  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
+0dB  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
MONO LOGIC  
EFFECT LVL  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
+0dB  
5.1 MUSIC  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
MUSIC  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
+0dB  
5.1a STANDARD  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
ON  
OFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
LFE MIX  
DECODING  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
MONO SURROUND  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1a FILM  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
LFE MIX  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
EFFECT LVL  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
+0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
MONO  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
5.1  
+0.0dB  
RE-EQUALIZER  
LFE MIX  
ON  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
ON  
AUTO  
OFF  
DECODING  
5.1 MONO SURR  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1 FILM  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
5.1a BYPASS  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1a MUSIC  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
MUSIC  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
5.1 MONO  
SUB L/R LVL  
CUSTOM  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
5.1  
MUSIC  
+0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
2CH BYPASS  
NO PARAMETERS  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-15)  
Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS, or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for  
the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode  
is selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.  
PANORAMA  
EFFECT LVL  
BASS CONTENT STEREO  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
INPUT BALANCE  
CALIBRATION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
PANORAMA CALIBRATION  
SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT  
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg  
LISTENER POS +0  
MONO LOGIC  
EFFECT LVL  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
MONO LOGIC  
EFFECT LVL  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
RESET MODE  
+4dB  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUB L/R  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
+0  
3.1kHz  
NOTE:  
ENSURE THAT  
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS  
BEEN PERFORMED  
PROPERLY  
<|>  
Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical  
regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS CONTENT  
BINAURL  
CENTER  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
-127 to +127  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
DECODING  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
PRESET  
OFF  
MONO  
STEREO  
CUSTOM  
ON  
OFF  
ACADEMY FILTER  
BASS ENHANCE  
CENTER DEPTH  
COMPRESSION  
DIMENSION  
EX DECODING  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
0 to 18  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
FRONT  
NEUTRAL  
REAR  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
BASS RT  
CENTER MIX  
CTR WIDTH  
EFFECT LVL  
FRONT STEERING  
ON  
OFF  
5ms to 48.6s  
-25 to +5dB  
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
-12 to +6dB  
OFF  
MSURR  
MUSIC  
FILM  
A-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
INPUT BALANCE  
MASTER LEVEL  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
SIZE  
SPEECH DETECT  
SURROUND DLY  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
-5 to +5dB  
4 to 20 or 30m  
ON  
0 to 15ms  
OFF  
LFE MIX  
MID RT  
REAR L/R  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
SOUND STAGE  
FRONT  
SUB L/R  
SURROUND EX  
AUTO  
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB  
24ms to 24.3s  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
NEUTRAL  
REAR  
ON  
OFF  
LISTENER POS  
PANORAMA  
PRE-DELAY  
RESET MODE  
SOURCE  
SUB L/R LVL  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
SURROUND MIX  
-127  
+0  
+127  
ON  
OFF  
RIGHT  
-5 to +5dB  
PRESS RIGHT V  
TO RESTORE MODE  
LEFT & RIGHT  
LEFT  
LIVENESS  
ROLLOFF  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
10 to 90deg  
SURR ROLLOFF  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
30ms to 20.2s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
+6.0dB  
+3.0dB  
+0.0dB  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
-25 to +25  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SIDE L/R  
ON  
OFF  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Menu Trees (continued from page A-17)  
Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 6-4 for more information.  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
EXIT  
HAVE BEEN RESTORED  
PRESS ANY KEY  
TO RESTART  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-20 for more information.  
2CH STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
D STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
D STATUS  
PG2  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
EX ENCODED  
CENTER MIX LVL  
SURR MIX LVL  
dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45  
-45  
5.1 ANALOG STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
DIGITAL STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
STATUS  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
PG2  
ENCODING  
dB  
0
-6  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45  
-45  
A-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET  
INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD1  
DVD2  
LD  
TV  
SAT  
VCR  
CD  
PVR  
GAME  
TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
D
5.1a  
MAIN ADVANCED  
INPUT SELECT  
ANALOG BYPASS  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ZONE2 IN  
RECORD IN  
RECORD ADVANCED  
ANLG IN LVL  
DIGITAL BYPASS  
DIG OUT RATE  
RECORD  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Lexicon  
Installation Worksheet (continued from page A-19)  
SPEAKER SETUP  
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT  
CENTER  
CUSTOM SETUP  
THX SETUP  
THX 80Hz  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
THX 80Hz  
SIDE LEFT/RIGHT 1 2  
REAR LEFT/RIGHT  
SUB LEFT/RIGHT 3  
SUB XOVER  
THX 80Hz  
MONO  
THX 80Hz  
OFF  
LFE  
ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
ASA  
UNITS  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS  
CAL NOISE  
L/R LIMITER  
L/R LIMIT ADJ  
LFE LIMITER  
LFE LIMIT ADJ  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Circle one.  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
MAIN PWR ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MODES  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG  
MUTE LEVEL  
AUDIO CNTRL  
SETUP  
ZONE PWR ON  
REC PWR ON  
A-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
MC-12  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
STATUS  
TRIGGER 1 SETUP  
TRIGGER 2 SETUP  
Circle all parameters set to ON.  
Circle all parameters set to ON.  
REMOTE ONLY  
DVD1  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
REMOTE ONLY  
DVD1  
2-CH SURROUND  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
POSITION  
DVD2  
DVD2  
LD  
LD  
FORMAT  
TV  
TV  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
STATUS  
SAT  
5.1 FILM  
SAT  
5.1 FILM  
VCR  
5.1 TV  
VCR  
5.1 TV  
CD  
5.1 MUSIC  
CD  
5.1 MUSIC  
PVR  
5.1  
5.1  
SurEX  
PVR  
5.1  
5.1  
SurEX  
GAME  
MUSIC  
GAME  
MUSIC  
TAPE  
DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
TAPE  
DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
BRIGHTNESS  
TUNER  
AUX  
TUNER  
AUX  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
RECORD INPUTS  
FILM  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
RECORD INPUTS  
FILM  
FILM  
FILM  
TV  
MUSIC  
TV  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
MUSIC  
MUSIC SURR  
PLII +  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
TREBLE  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
2-CHAN  
5.1a FILM  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
2-CHAN  
5.1a FILM  
TILT EQ  
5.1a MUSIC  
5.1a MUSIC  
R
R
LOUDNESS  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
FILM  
5.1a  
5.1a  
SurEX  
R
R
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
BALANCE  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
5.1a STANDARD  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL  
5.1a BYPASS  
FADER  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
RECORD BALANCE  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2CH BYPASS  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
2CH BYPASS  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Index  
SYMBOLS & LOGOS  
NUMBERS (continued)  
NUMBERS (continued)  
7/5 Button, 2-17  
Documentation Conventions, ii  
, see Dolby  
, see also dts, dts-ES, dts(-ES)  
5.1  
ill.)  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-16, A-15 (menu  
8 STEREO INPUTS Option, 3-58, A-5, A-20  
5.1  
TV Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-16, A-15 (menu ill.)  
R
5.1 MONO Listening Mode, 5-22, A-15 (menu ill.)  
, see dts Neo:6  
A
5.1 MONO LOGIC Listening Mode, 5-21, A-15 (menu  
ill.)  
, see ES  
A/V SYNC DELAY Parameter, 3-59, A-5, A-21  
ACADEMY FILTER Parameter, 5-14, 5-21, 5-34, A-16  
ANALOG BYPASS Parameter, 3-15, A-7, A-19  
, see LOGIC7  
, see THX  
5.1 MONO SURR Listening Mode, 5-22, A-15 (menu ill.)  
5.1  
Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-17 to 5-18, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
ANALOG IN Parameter, 3-6, 3-7 (menu ills.), A-7  
(menu ill.), A-19  
NUMBERS  
2.0 ENCODING Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
5.1  
5.1  
5.1  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-19, A-15 (menu ill.)  
ULTRA2 Listening Mode, 5-17 to 5-18  
SurEX Listening Mode, 5-17 to 5-18  
ANLG IN LVL PARAMETER  
INPUT SETUP Menus, 3-6, 3-8 to 3-9 (menu ill.),  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
Level Meters, 3-9  
2-CH Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 to 3-13 (menu ill.), 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
5.1a 2-CHANNEL Listening Mode, 5-31, A-15 (menu ill.)  
5.1a BYPASS Listening Mode, 5-31, A-15 (menu ill.)  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23  
2-CH SURROUND Listening Mode, 5-14, A-15  
RECORD ADV Menus, 3-19, 3-20, A-7, A-19  
(menu ill.)  
Arrow Buttons, 2-11, 2-17  
2-CHANNEL Listening Mode, 5-14, A-15 (menu ill.)  
2CH Button, 2-17  
5.1a  
FILM Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-27, A-15 (menu ill.)  
AUDIO CNTRL Parameter, 3-67, A-5, A-20  
5.1a  
(menu ill.)  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-28, A-15  
AUDIO CONTROLS Menu, 4-2 to 4-7 (ill.), A-13  
(menu ill.), A-21  
2CH BYPASS Listening Mode, 5-32, A-15 (menu ill.)  
2CH BYPASS STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
2CH STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), A-18 (menu ill.)  
5.1a Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13, 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
AUTO AZIMUTH Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-34, A-16  
AUTO DISTANCES Screen, 3-48 (ill.), A-11 (menu ill.),  
A-12 (menu ill.)  
5 SPKR ENHANCE Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-15,  
5-16, 5-23, 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-34, A-16  
5.1a STANDARD Listening Mode, 5-30, A-15 (menu ill.)  
5.1a  
(menu ill.)  
Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-28 to 5-29, A-15  
AUTO GAIN Parameter, 3-8 to 3-9, A-7  
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG Option, 3-58, A-5, A-20  
5.1 2-CHANNEL Listening Mode, 5-21, A-15 (menu ill.)  
5.1 ANALOG STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
AUTO LEVELS Screen, 3-48 (ill.), A-11 (menu ill.),  
A-12 (menu ill.)  
5.1a  
5.1a  
5.1a  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-30, A-15 (menu ill.)  
ULTRA2 Listening Mode, 5-28 to 5-29  
SurEX Listening Mode, 5-28 to 5-29  
5.1  
FILM Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-15, A-15 (menu ill.)  
. . . Index continues on page I-2  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
C (continued)  
D (continued)  
A (continued)  
CHECK MICROPHONES Option, 3-34, 3-38 to 3-39  
DISPLAY SETUP Menu, 2-12 (ills.), 3-2, 3-59 to 3-63  
AUTO Parameter, 3-8 to 3-9, A-7  
(screen ills.), A-10 (screen ills.)  
(ills.), A-5 (ill.), A-21  
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP Screens, 3-46 to 3-49 (ills.),  
CHURCH Listening Mode, 5-11, A-14 (menu ill.)  
DISTANCES & LEVELS Option, 3-34, 3-46 to 3-49  
DISTANCES Option, 3-34, 3-46 to 3-49  
Documentation Conventions, ii  
A-10 (ills.), A-11 (ills.), A-12 (ills.)  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES Parameter, 5-21, 5-27, 5-31,  
5-35, A-16  
Automatic Calibration, 3-34 to 3-50  
Command Bank Selection Buttons, 2-14  
D Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13, 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
B
COMPRESSION Parameter, 5-15, 5-16, 5-18, 5-19,  
5-20, 5-21, 5-35, A-16  
BACKGROUND Parameter, 3-61, 3-62, A-5, A-21  
BALANCE Parameter, 4-2, 4-7, A-13, A-21  
BASS CONTENT Parameter, 5-12, 5-34, A-16  
D STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-22, A-18 (ill.)  
COMPONENT IN Parameter, 3-6, 3-10 to 3-11  
(menu ill.), A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
DIGITAL EX Listening Mode, 5-19 to 5-20, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
COMPONENT OSD Parameter, 3-15, 3-17, A-7, A-19  
CONCERT HALL Listening Mode, 5-10, A-14 (menu ill.)  
Crossover Points, Setting, 3-21 to 3-32 (ills.)  
BASS ENHANCE Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-15,  
5-16, 5-23, 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-35, A-16  
DIGITAL Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-19 to 5-20, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
BASS Parameter, 4-2, 4-3 (frequency-response graph),  
A-13, A-21  
PLII +  
Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-7, A-14 (menu ill.)  
CROSSOVER SETUP Menu, 3-21 to 3-22 (ill.), 3-24  
(ill.), 3-26 (ill.), 3-30 (ill.), A-9 (ill.)  
PLII MOVIE Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-8, A-14 (menu ill.)  
PLII MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-8, A-14 (menu ill.)  
PRO LOGIC Listening Mode, 5-9, A-14 (menu ill.)  
STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-22, A-18 (ill.)  
BASS PEAK LIMITERS Menu, 3-56 (ill.), A-13 (ill.), A-20  
BASS RT Parameter, 5-11, 5-35, A-16  
BIT RATE Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
CTR WIDTH Parameter, 5-8, 5-36, A-16  
CUSTOM Menu, 5-33 (ills.), A-16 (ill.)  
CUSTOM NAME Parameter, 3-59, A-5  
BLUE Button, 2-16  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-24 to 5-26, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
BRIGHTNESS Parameter, 3-63, A-5, A-21  
CUSTOM Option, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11,  
5-12, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-22,  
5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31,  
5-36, A-21  
ULTRA2 Listening Mode, 5-24 to 5-25  
2-CHAN Listening Mode, 5-27, A-15 (menu ill.)  
Decoding, 5-22 to 5-23  
C
CAL NOISE Parameter, 3-56, 3-57, A-13, A-20  
CUSTOM SETUP Menu, 3-25, 3-22 (ill.), 3-26 (ill.),  
3-30 (ill.), A-9 (menu ill.), A-20  
CALIBRATION  
Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-26, A-15 (menu ill.)  
Automatic, 3-34 to 3-50  
Manual, 3-51 to 3-57  
CUSTOM VS PRESET Option, 5-33, 5-36, A-16  
FILM Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-23, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
Option, PANORAMA Listening Mode, 5-12 to  
5-13 (ills.), 5-35  
Output Levels, 3-34 to 3-57  
Speaker Distances, 3-34 to 3-57  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-24, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
D
DIALOG OFFSET Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
DIG OUT RATE Parameter, 3-19, 3-20, A-7, A-19  
DIGITAL BYPASS, 3-19, 3-20, A-7, A-19  
Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13, 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
CATHEDRAL Listening Mode, 5-11, A-14 (menu ill.)  
CENTER DEPTH Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-35 ,A-16  
CENTER MIX LVL Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-24 to 5-25, A-15  
(menu ill.)  
DIGITAL IN Parameter, 3-6 to 3-7 (menu ill.), A-7  
R
(menu ill.), A-19  
FILM Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-9, A-14 (menu  
ill.)  
DIGITAL STATUS Menu, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
CENTER MIX Parameter, 5-21, 5-27, 5-31, 5-35, A-16  
CHANNELS Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
R
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-9, A-14 (menu  
DIMENSION Parameter, 5-8, 5-36, A-16  
ill.)  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
I (continued)  
I (continued)  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME Option, 3-59, 3-60, A-5, A-21  
EDIT INPUT NAME Option, 3-4 to 3-5 (menu ill.), A-7  
INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)  
INPUTS (continued)  
Audio  
AES/EBU, 2-7  
Analog, 2-7  
Zone 2, 2-5, 2-14, 2-15, 2-19 , 3-2, 3-3, 3-14,  
3-17, 3-18  
EFFECT LVL Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-14, 5-21,  
5-36, A-16  
Inspection Instructions x  
DECODING Parameter, 5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26,  
5-27, 5-36 to 5-37, A-16  
(C), 2-7, 3-58  
Digital, 2-7  
Installation Considerations, 1-4  
Installation Worksheet, A-19 to A-20  
INTERNAL NOISE Screen, 3-53 (ill.), A-13 (menu ill.)  
Internal Noise Test, 3-51, 3-53, 3-54  
IR Receiver, 2-3 (ill.)  
ENCODING Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
EX DECODING Parameter, 5-20, 5-37, A-16  
EX ENCODED Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
External Noise Test, 3-51, 3-53, 3-55  
(L), 2-7, 3-58  
(LS), 2-7, 3-58  
(R), 2-7, 3-58  
(RS), 2-7, 3-58  
S/PDIF Coaxial, 2-7  
S/PDIF Optical, 2-7  
(SUB), 2-7, 3-58  
IR IN, 2-10  
L
F
L/R LIMIT ADJ Parameter, 3-56, 3-57, A-13, A-20  
L/R LIMITER Parameter, 3-56, 3-57, A-13, A-20  
Factory-Default Settings, Restoring, 6-4 to 6-5  
FACTORY SETTINGS Menu, 6-4, A-18 (ill.)  
FADER Parameter, 4-2, 4-7, A-13, A-21  
FORMAT Parameter, 3-61, 3-62, A-5, A-21  
FP Button, 2-16  
Microphone, 2-10, 3-35 (ill.)  
Video, 2-9  
LEVELS CALIBRATION Menu, 3-53 (ill.), 3-56 (ill.),  
A-13 (menu ill.), A-20  
INPUT NAME Menu, 3-4 to 3-5 (ills.), A-7 (menu ill.)  
INPUT Parameter, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24  
LEVELS Option, 3-34, 3-46 to 3-49  
LFE LIMIT ADJ Parameter, 3-56, 3-57, A-13, A-20  
LFE LIMITER Parameter, 3-56, 3-57, A-13, A-20  
INPUT SELECT Parameter, 3-15, 3-16, A-7, A-19  
FRONT PANEL  
Overview, 2-2 to 2-5  
MC-12, 2-2 (ill.)  
INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS  
Front Panel, 2-5  
LFE MIX Parameter, 5-15, 5-16, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20,  
5-21, 5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29,  
5-30, 5-31, 5-38, A-17  
Main Zone, 2-5  
Record Zone, 2-5  
Remote Control, 2-14 to 2-15  
Zone 2, 2-5  
MC-12 Balanced, 2-4 (ill.)  
Front Panel Display, 2-3  
LIGHT Button, 2-14  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Option, 3-59  
LISTENER POS Parameter, 5-12, 5-38, A-17  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Menu, 3-63 (ill.), A-5 (menu  
ill.), A-21  
LISTENING MODES  
Activating, 5-2 to 5-4  
Descriptions, 5-5 to 5-34  
Parameter Descriptions, 5-34 to 5-42  
Preferred, Selecting, 3-11 to 3-13  
INPUT SETUP Menus, 3-2, 3-3 to 3-20 (ills.), 5-3  
(ills.), A-5 to A-8 (ills.), A-19  
FRONT STEERING Parameter, 5-6, 5-7, 5-37, A-16  
INPUT TYPE Parameter, 2-21, 2-23, 2-24  
INPUTS  
I
Advanced Settings, Configuring, 3-14 to 3-20  
Main Zone, 2-5, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, 2-19, 3-2, 3-3,  
3-11, 3-14, 3-15, 3-18, 5-3  
Names, Changing, 3-4 to 3-5  
Record Zone, 2-5, 2-14, 2-15, 2-19, 3-2, 3-3, 3-14,  
3-17, 3-18, 3-19  
LIVENESS Parameter, 5-10, 5-38, A-17  
INPUT BALANCE Parameter, 5-12, 5-37, A-17  
LOCK OPTIONS Menu, 3-3, 3-66 to 3-67 (ills.), A-5  
(ill.), A-20  
INPUT CONNECTORS  
AC, 2-7  
Assigning, 3-6 to 3-11  
. . . Index continues on page I-4  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M (continued)  
O (continued)  
OUTPUT CONNECTORS  
Audio  
Balanced, 2-9  
L (continued)  
MODE + & – Buttons, 2-16, 5-4  
FILM Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-5, A-14 (menu ill.)  
MODE ADJUST Menu, 5-2 (ill.) to 5-42, A-14 (ill.)  
MUSIC Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-6, A-14 (menu ill.)  
MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS  
, 2-18, 5-4  
MUSIC SURR Listening Mode, 5-7, A-14 (menu  
Center, 2-7, 3-58  
Front L/R, 2-7, 3-58  
LFE, 2-7, 3-58  
ill.)  
, 2-18, 5-4  
, 2-18, 5-4  
TV Listening Mode, 5-4, 5-6, A-14 (menu ill.)  
LOUDNESS Parameter, 4-2, 4-6 (frequency-response  
graph), A-13, A-21  
Main Zone, 2-7  
MUSIC, 2-18, 5-4  
, 2-18, 5-4  
Rear L/R, 2-7, 3-58  
Record Zone, 2-9  
Side L/R, 2-7, 3-58  
Subwoofer L/R, 2-7, 3-58  
Zone 2, 2-7  
LOW FREQ WIDTH Parameter, 5-12, 5-38, A-17  
TVL, 2-18, 5-4  
Lowpass Filter, 3-23 (ill.)  
MODE Parameter, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24  
MODES Parameter, 3-67, A-5, A-20  
M
MONO Listening Mode, 5-15, A-15 (menu ill.)  
MONO LOGIC Listening Mode, 5-14, A-15 (menu ill.)  
Trigger, 2-10  
MAIN ADV Menus, 3-14 (ill.), A-7 (ill.), A-8 (ills.)  
MAIN ADVANCED Option, 3-14 to 3-17, A-7, A-19  
Video  
Main Zone, 2-9  
Record Zone, 2-9  
MONO SURROUND Listening Mode, 5-15, A-15  
MAIN MENU, 2-11 (ill.), 2-12 (ills.), 3-2 to 3-8 (ills.),  
3-10 to 3-12 (ills.), 3-14 (ill.), 3-19 (ill.), 3-21 to  
3-22 (ills.), 3-24 (ill.), 3-26 (ill.), 3-28 (ill.), 3-30  
(ill.), 3-38 (ill.), 3-46 (ill.), 4-2 (ill.), 5-2 (ill.), A-5 to  
A-14 (ills.)  
(menu ill.)  
Mute Button, 2-3, 2-16  
Output Levels, Calibrating  
Automatic, 3-34 to 3-50  
Bass Peak Limiters, 3-56 to 3-57  
Manual, 3-51, 3-53 to 3-55  
Parameters, 3-32 to 3-33  
MUTE LEVEL Parameter, 3-64, A-5, A-20  
MAIN PWR ON Parameter, 3-64, A-5, A-20  
Manual Calibration, 3-51 to 3-57  
N
NAME Parameter, 3-4 to 3-5 (menu ills.), A-7 (menu  
MANUAL Parameter, 3-8 to 3-9, A-7  
ill.), A-19  
OUTPUT LEVELS Option, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9,  
5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16, 5-18, 5-19,  
5-20, 5-21, 5-22, 5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27,  
5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-31, 5-39  
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP Menu, 3-51 to 3-53 (ill.),  
NIGHTCLUB Listening Mode, 5-10, A-14 (menu ill.)  
A-13 (ill.)  
MASTER LEVEL Parameter, 5-21, 5-27, 5-31, 5-38, A-17  
O
OUTPUT LEVELS Menu, 5-32, A-16  
MC-12  
OFF BUTTONS  
Main Zone, 2-5  
Record Zone, 2-5  
Zone 2, 2-5  
About the, 1-2 to 1-4  
Highlights, 1-3  
Product Registration, 1-4  
P
PANORAMA CALIBRATION Menu, 5-12 to 5-13  
MENU Button, 2-11, 2-17  
(ills.), A-16 (menu ill.)  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY Option, 3-59  
Menu Tree, A-5 to A-18 (ills.)  
MID RT Parameter, 5-11, 5-38, A-17  
MIX ROOM Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
Mode ꢀ & ꢁ Buttons, 2-3, 5-4  
PANORAMA Listening Mode, 5-12 to 5-13, A-14  
(menu ill.), A-15 (menu ill.), A-16  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY Menu, 3-61 to 3-62 (ill.), A-5  
(ill.), A-21  
PANORAMA Parameter, 5-8, 5-39, A-17  
Options, Selecting, 2-12  
OSD Button, 2-16  
I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P (continued)  
R (continued)  
REMOTE CONTROL  
S (continued)  
PARAMETERS  
SETTING LEVELS Screen, 3-47 (ill.), A-11 (ill.), A-12  
(ill.)  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection, 5-3  
Selecting, 2-12 to 2-13  
Battery Installation, 1-5 (ills.)  
SETUP Menu, 2-12 (ills.), 3-2 to 3-67 (ills.), A-5 to  
A-13 (ills.)  
Command Banks  
Activating, 2-13  
Main Zone, 2-14 to 2-18, 3-62  
Record Zone, 2-14 to 2-18, 3-62  
Shift, 2-14 to 2-18, 3-62  
Zone 2, 2-14 to 2-18, 3-62  
POSITION Parameter, 3-61, 3-62, A-5, A-21  
Power Switch, 2-7  
SETUP Parameter, 3-67, A-5, A-20  
SIZE Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-40, A-17  
SOUND STAGE Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-40, A-17  
SOURCE Parameter, 5-12, 5-40, A-17  
PRE-DELAY Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-39, A-17  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters  
2-CH Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 to 3-13 (menu ill.),  
5-3, A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
D Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13, 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13,  
5-3, A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
5.1a Parameter, 3-11, 3-12 (menu ill.), 3-13, 5-3,  
A-7 (menu ill.), A-19  
Command Matrix, 2-13 to 2-18  
Illustrations, 2-14 to 2-18  
Menu Item Selection, 2-12 to 2-13  
Menu Navigation, 2-11  
Operation Considerations, 2-10  
Overview, 2-10 to 2-18  
SPEAKER ANGLE Parameter, 5-12, 5-40, A-17  
SPEAKER CALIBRATION PARAMETERS  
CENTER, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
FRONT LEFT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
FRONT RIGHT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
LFE, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
MONO SUB, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
REAR LEFT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
REAR RIGHT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
SIDE LEFT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
SIDE RIGHT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
SUB LEFT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
SUB RIGHT, 3-32 to 3-33, A-11, A-12, A-13, A-20  
UNITS, 3-32 to 3-33, A-13, A-20  
REMOTE ONLY Parameter, 3-65, 3-66, A-5, A-21  
REMOTE STATE Parameter, 3-61, 3-62, A-5, A-21  
Removable Access Panel, 2-10  
Program Operation Parameters, 3-65, 3-66, A-5, A-21  
R
RESET MODE Option, 5-33 to 5-34, 5-39, A-17  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME Option, 3-5, A-7  
RS-232 Connectors, 2-9  
RE-EQUALIZER Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-15, 5-16,  
5-18, 5-23, 5-25, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-39, A-17  
REAR DLY OFFSET Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-12,  
5-15, 5-16, 5-23, 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-39, A-17  
ROLLOFF Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-39, A-17  
Routine Maintenance, 6-4  
REAR PANEL  
SPEAKER DISTANCES Menu, 3-52 (ill.), A-13 (ill.),  
A-20  
Overview, 2-6 to 2-10  
MC-12, 2-6 (ill.)  
MC-12 Balanced, 2-8 (ill.)  
Speaker Distances, Calibrating  
Automatic, 3-34 to 3-50  
Manual, 3-51, 3-52  
S
S-VIDEO 16:9 Parameter, 3-15, A-7, A-19  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 Parameter, 3-15, 3-17, A-7, A-19  
Safety Instructions ii, v, ix, x  
REAR PANEL CONFIG Menu, 3-2, 3-58 (ill.), A-5 (ill.),  
A-20  
Parameters, 3-32 to 3-33  
REC PWR ON Parameter, 3-64, 3-65, A-5, A-20  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST Menu, 3-53 (ill.), A-13 (ill.)  
SAMPLE RATE Parameter, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24  
SET DISTANCES Screen, 3-49 (ill.)  
SET LEVELS Screen, 3-49 (ill.)  
RECORD ADV Menus, 3-19 (ill.), A-7 (ill.), A-8 (ills.)  
SPEAKER SETUP Menu, 3-2, 3-21 to 3-57 (ills.), A-5  
(ill.), A-9 to A-13 (ills.), A-20  
RECORD ADVANCED Option, 3-14, 3-19 to 3-20,  
A-7, A-19  
SETTING DISTANCES Screen, 3-47 (ill.), A-11 (ill.),  
A-12 (ill.)  
RECORD BALANCE Parameter, 4-2, 4-7, A-13, A-21  
RECORD IN Parameter, 3-14, 3-17 to 3-18, A-7, A-19  
RECORD Parameter, 3-19, 3-20, A-7, A-19  
. . . Index continues on page I-6  
I-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
S (continued)  
V
S (continued)  
SUB L/R LVL Parameter, 5-14, 5-15, 5-21, 5-22, 5-27,  
5-31, 5-40, A-17  
VIDEO IN Parameter, 3-6, 3-10 (menu ill.), A-7 (menu  
ill.), A-19  
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS  
ASA, 3-25, 3-31 to 3-32, A-9, A-20  
BGC, 3-25, 3-31, A-9, A-20  
CENTER, 3-25, 3-26 (menu ill.), 3-27, A-9 (menu  
ill.), A-20  
SURR MIX LVL Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
VOCAL ENHANCE Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-15,  
5-16, 5-23, 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-42, A-17  
SURR ROLLOFF Parameter, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-12, 5-14,  
5-21, 5-41, A-17  
VOL + & – Buttons, 2-16  
FRONT L/R, 3-25, 3-26 to 3-27 (menu ill.), A-9  
(menu ill.), A-20  
LFE, 3-25, 3-30, A-9, A-20  
REAR L/R, 3-25, 3-26 (menu ill.), 3-28 (menu ill.),  
SURROUND DLY Parameter, 5-8, 5-41, A-17  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP Menu, 3-2, 3-64 to 3-65  
(ill.), A-5 (ill.), A-20  
SURROUND EX Parameter, 5-18, 5-29, 5-41, A-17  
Volume Knob, 2-3 to 2-5  
SURROUND MIX Parameter, 5-21, 5-27, 5-31, 5-42,  
A-17  
Volume Levels, Adjusting, 2-3 to 2-5 (ills.)  
A-9 (menu ill.), A-20  
SIDE L/R, 3-25, 3-26 (menu ill.), 3-27, A-9 (menu  
ill.), A-20  
T
W
SUB L/R, 3-25, 3-26 (menu ill.), 3-29, A-9 (menu  
ill.), A-20  
Table of Contents iii, iv  
WORD LENGTH Parameter, 2-22, 2-24  
REAR SPEAKERS Menu, 3-28 (ill.), A-9 (ill.)  
SUB XOVER, 3-25, 3-26 (menu ill.), 3-29, A-9  
(menu ill.), A-20  
ULTRA2 SUB, 3-25, 3-31, A-9, A-20  
SETUP Menu, 3-25, 3-24 (ill.), 3-28 (ill.), 3-30  
(ill.), A-9 (ill.), A-20  
Z
ZONE PWR ON Parameter, 3-64, A-5, A-20  
ZONE2 BALANCE Parameter, 4-2, 4-7, A-13, A-21  
ZONE2 IN Parameter, 3-14, 3-17 to 3-18, A-7, A-19  
Zones, Understanding the, 2-19  
SPEAKER SETUPS  
Custom, 3-22 to 3-23, 3-25 to 3-32  
, 3-24, 3-25 to 3-32  
SPEAKER SETUP Screen, 3-24 (ill.), 3-28 (ill.),  
3-30 (ill.), A-9 (ill.)  
TILT EQ Parameter, 4-2, 4-5 (frequency-response graph),  
A-13, A-21  
SPEECH DETECT Parameter, 5-10, 5-11, 5-40, A-17  
Standby Button, 2-2, 2-14  
TREBLE Parameter, 4-2, 4-4 (frequency-response graph),  
A-13, A-21  
STAT Button, 2-17  
TRIGGER SETUP Menus, 3-2, 3-65 to 3-66 (ill.), A-5 (ill.)  
STATUS MENUS  
Activating, 2-20 to 2-21  
Troubleshooting, 6-2 to 6-3  
TWO-LINE STATUS  
Main Zone, 2-19 (ill.)  
Record Zone, 2-20 (ill.)  
Zone 2, 2-19 (ill.)  
2CH BYPASS STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
2CH STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), A-18 (menu ill.)  
5.1 ANALOG STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23  
D STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-22, A-18 (ill.)  
DIGITAL STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-23, A-18 (ill.)  
STATUS, 2-21 (ill.), 2-22, A-18 (ill.)  
Level Meters, 2-25  
U
Unpacking Instructions x  
Parameter Descriptions, 2-24 to 2-25  
STATUS PARAMETER  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Menu, 3-63, A-5, A-21  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY Menu, 3-61, A-5, A-21  
I-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRODUCT REGISTRATION  
Please register this product within 15 days of purchase. To  
do so, complete and return this card or register online at  
www.lexicon.com. This card serves no warranty purposes.  
Retain the sales receipt for proof of coverage.  
Mr.  
Mrs.  
Ms.  
Miss  
Single  
Married  
Divorced  
Widowed  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
First Name  
Company  
Last Name  
Title  
Mailing Address  
City  
Lexicon, Inc. offers the following warranty on this product:  
2. Damage occurring during any shipment of this product.  
Claims for shipping damages must be made with the  
carrier.  
3. Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt. (A  
copy of the original dated sales receipt must be  
presented whenever warranty service is required.)  
State  
Zip  
Telephone Number  
Email Address  
Product Model  
Version  
Fax Number  
What is the Duration of this Warranty?  
Purchase Date  
Serial Number  
3. Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on which  
the serial number has been defaced, modified, or  
removed.  
4. Do not include accessories such as power cords or  
user guides unless instructed to do so.  
This warranty will remain in effect for three (3) years from  
the original date of purchase.  
Where did you purchase this product?  
Age Education  
High School  
Household Income  
Under $20,000  
Under 18  
18-24  
25-34  
35-49  
50-64  
65+  
College  
Graduate School  
Certificate:  
$20,000 to $34,999  
$35,000 to $49,000  
$50,000 to $74,999  
$75,000 to $99,000  
$100,000+  
What are the Limitations of Implied Warranties?  
Who is Covered?  
What Expenses will Lexicon, Inc. Assume?  
Any implied warranties, including warranties of  
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are  
limited in duration to the length of this warranty.  
This warranty may be enforced by the original purchaser  
and subsequent owners during the warranty period,  
provided the original dated sales receipt or other proof of  
warranty coverage is presented at time of service.  
Lexicon, Inc. will pay all labor and material expenses for  
covered items. Payment of shipping charges is discussed in  
the next section of the warranty.  
How did you learn about this product? Choose one:  
Friend  
Colleague  
Teacher  
Store salesperson  
Store display  
Received as a gift  
Advertisement  
Magazine Article  
Own other Lexicon  
products  
What Certain Damages are Excluded?  
How is Service Obtained?  
Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product?  
Lexicon’s liability for a defective product is limited to repair  
or replacement of that product, at our option. Lexicon, Inc.  
shall not be liable for damages based on inconvenience;  
loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted operation;  
commercial loss; or any other damages, whether incidental,  
consequential, or otherwise.  
What is Covered?  
Sound  
Features  
Quality  
Brandname  
Value for price  
Other:  
Durability  
When this product needs service, write, telephone, or fax  
Lexicon, Inc. to request information about where the unit  
should be taken or sent. When making a written request,  
please include your name, complete address, and daytime  
telephone number; the product model and serial numbers;  
and a description of the problem. Do not return the unit to  
Lexicon, Inc. without prior authorization.  
This warranty covers all defects in material and  
workmanship on this product, except as specified below.  
The following are not covered:  
What are your three favorite magazines?  
1. 2.  
What are your three favorite websites?  
1. 2.  
3.  
1. Damage resulting from  
3.  
What features would you like to see added to this product in the future?  
A. Accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.  
B. Failure to follow instructions contained in the user  
guide.  
How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?  
MC-12 | 06/03  
Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of  
implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation of  
incidental or consequential damages. As such, the above  
limitations may not apply.  
When Shipping a Product for Service . . .  
C. Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by  
Lexicon, Inc.  
1. Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the  
responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are  
covered by this warranty, Lexicon, Inc. will pay return  
shipping charges to any destination in the United  
States using the carrier of our choice.  
D. Failure to perform recommended periodic  
maintenance.  
E. Causes other than product defects, including lack  
of skill, competence, or experience on the part of  
the owner.  
This warranty is not enforceable outside of North America.  
This warranty provides specific legal rights. Additional rights  
may be provided by some states.  
2. Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is strongly  
recommended.  
Lexicon, Inc.  
3 Oak Park  
Tel 781-280-0300  
Fax 781-280-0490  
Customer Support  
Tel 781-280-0300  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413  
USA  
Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)  
Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)  
www.lexicon.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lexicon, Inc.  
3 Oak Park  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
Tel  
781-280-0300  
Fax 781-280-0490  
www.lexicon.com  
Customer Support  
Tel  
781-280-0300  
Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)  
Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)  
Lexicon Part No. 070-14773 | Rev 2 | 06/03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

KTI Networks Network Card KCD 400 Series User Manual
Lenoxx Electronics Clock Radio CR 501 User Manual
Link electronic Switch IEC 787 User Manual
Magic Chef Oven 9112 Gas User Manual
Manhattan Computer Products TV Receiver HDS2 User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Ice Maker K00341 User Manual
Master Appliance Blowtorch MT 5 User Manual
Master Bilt Refrigerator IM 38 User Manual
Maytag Range MER5530 User Manual
Maytag Refrigerator G32026PEKS User Manual